Yamaha RX-V463 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V463

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V463

Printed in China WN25670

RX-V463

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008,

1013, 1014, 1042,

1045, 1047

Memphis 1050

Metz 1048

MGA 1014

MGN Technology

1002, 1014

Micromaxx 1044, 1048

Microstar 1044, 1048

Migros 1042

Minolta 1010

Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046

Montgomery Ward

1008

Motorola 1004, 1008

MTC 1002, 1014

Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006,

1042, 1046, 1050

Murphy 1042

National 1048

NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1043, 1051

Neckermann 1043, 1046

NEI 1046

Nesco 1050

Nikko 1003

Noblex 1002, 1014

Nokia 1043, 1047

Nordmende 1043

Oceanic 1042, 1043

Okano 1044

Olympus 1004

Optimus 1003, 1008

Orion 1012, 1013, 1044,

1065

Orson 1042

Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050

Otto Versand 1046

Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050

Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034,

1040, 1048, 1054,

1072

Pathe Marconi 1043

Penney 1010, 1014

Pentax 1010, 1049

Perdio 1042

Philco 1004, 1051

Philips 1004, 1025, 1033,

1046, 1056, 1057,

1059, 1062, 1063

Philips Magnavox

1018

Phonola 1046

Pilot 1003

Pioneer 1011, 1046

Prinz 1042

Profex 1050

Profitronic 1014

Proline 1042

Proscan 1009

Prosonic 1044

Protec 1006

Pye 1046, 1056

Quarter 1001

Quartz 1001, 1047

Quasar 1004, 1035

Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047

Radio Shack 1003

Radio Shack/Realistic

1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

Radiola 1046

Radix 1003

Randex 1003

RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,

1010, 1014, 1015,

1022, 1032

Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

Rex 1043

RFT 1046

Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066

Saba 1043

Saisho 1044, 1050

Salora 1047

Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021,

1027, 1052, 1068,

1070

Sanky 1008

Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013,

1043

Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014,

1047

SBR 1046

Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047

Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045,

1046, 1050

Scott 1012

Sears 1001, 1003, 1004,

1010

SEG 1050

SEI-Sinudyne 1046

Seleco 1043

Sentron 1050

Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028,

1053, 1073

Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050

Shivaki 1045

Shogun 1002, 1014

Siemens 1045, 1047

Signature 2000 1008

Silva 1045

Singer 1004, 1006

Sinudyne 1046

Sontec 1045

Sony 1016, 1019, 1055,

1060, 1064, 1074

STS 1004, 1010

Sunkai 1044

Sunstar 1042

Suntronic 1042

Sunwood 1050

Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031,

1041

Symphonic 1005

Taisho 1044

Tandy 1001

Tashiko 1003, 1042

Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043,

1046, 1066

TCM 1044, 1048

Teac 1005, 1007

Technics 1004, 1048

Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005

Teleavia 1043

Telefunken 1043

Tenosal 1050

Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050

Tevion 1044, 1048

Thomson 1043, 1058

Thorn 1043, 1047

TMK 1002, 1014

Tokai 1045, 1050

Tonsai 1050

Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029,

1043, 1046, 1066,

1075

Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014

Towada 1050

Towika 1050

Uher 1045

Unitech 1002, 1014

Universum 1042, 1045, 1046

Vector Research 1000

Video Concepts 1000

Videon 1044, 1048

Videosonic 1002, 1014

Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,

1005, 1006, 1008,

1010, 1014

Weltblick 1045

White Westinghouse

1013

XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006

Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007

Yamis h i 10 50

Yokan 1050

Yoko 1045, 1050

Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037

RX-V463_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:48 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page i Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-ii En

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page ii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution-iii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press

STANDBY/ON to set this

unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet.

Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is turned off by

STANDBY/ON.

This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this

unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of

power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page iii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Features ................................................................... 2

Getting started ........................................................ 3

Quick start guide .................................................... 4

Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4

Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5

Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other

components............................................................ 6

Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button................................... 7

What do you want to do with this unit? ..................... 8

Connections ............................................................. 9

Rear panel .................................................................. 9

Placing speakers....................................................... 10

Connecting speakers ................................................ 11

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13

Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14

Audio and video signal flow.................................... 14

Connecting video components................................. 15

Connecting other components ................................. 16

Connecting audio components................................. 18

Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or

Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 19

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 19

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20

Connecting the power cable..................................... 20

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 21

Turning on and off the power .................................. 21

Front panel display .................................................. 22

Optimizing the speaker setting

for your listening room .................................... 24

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 24

Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 28

Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 28

Creating your original SCENE templates................ 31

Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 32

Playback ................................................................ 33

Basic operations....................................................... 33

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 34

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 34

Displaying the current status of this unit on a video

monitor ................................................................ 35

Using your headphones............................................ 35

Muting the audio output........................................... 35

Playing video sources in the background of an audio

source................................................................... 36

Displaying the input source information ................. 36

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 37

Sound field programs ........................................... 38

Sound field program descriptions ............................ 38

Using audio features ............................................. 41

Enjoying high quality sound.................................... 41

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 41

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 41

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 42

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 43

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 43

Manual tuning .......................................................... 43

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 44

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 44

Selecting preset stations........................................... 45

Exchanging preset station ........................................ 45

XM Satellite Radio tning ......................................46

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 46

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 47

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 47

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 49

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 50

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning .........................51

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 51

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.. 52

Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ............ 52

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset

channels ............................................................... 54

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 54

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 56

Using iPod™ ..........................................................57

Controlling iPod™................................................... 57

Using Bluetooth™ components ............................59

Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth

component ........................................................... 59

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 59

Recording ...............................................................60

SET MENU ............................................................61

Using SET MENU ................................................... 62

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 63

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 68

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 70

Remote control features........................................73

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 73

Setting remote control codes ................................... 75

Advanced setup......................................................76

Troubleshooting.....................................................78

Glossary..................................................................88

Specifications .........................................................90

Index .......................................................................91

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

List of remote control codes ................................. iii

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the

front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button

names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the

button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications

are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case

of differences between the manual and product, the product has

priority.

•“

SPEAKERS” or “4DVD” (example) indicates the name of the

parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached

sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about

each position of the parts.

• The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding

reference page(s).

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Features

2 En

Built-in 5-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

105 W/ch

[Other models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

105 W/ch

SCENE select function

◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations

◆ SCENE template customizing capability

Decoders and DSP circuits

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-

channel surround sound

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode

◆ Dolby Digital decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder

◆ DTS decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Radio tuners

◆ FM/AM tuning capability

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock, sold separately)

◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using SIRIUS

Connect tuner, sold separately)

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition

video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as

multi-channel digital audio

DOCK terminal

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter

(such as YBA-10, sold separately).

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ DIRECT mode for high quality sound for all sources

◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ Component video input/output capability

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ iPod controlling capability

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

iPod™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is

used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of

DTS, Inc.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Features

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 2 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Getting started

3 En

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Supplied accessories

Check that you received all of the following parts.

❏ Remote control

❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)

❏ Optimizer microphone

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range

of the remote control decreases.

• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control

code.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

Getting started

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a

straight slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

Asia model ................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model

...................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Notes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 3 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Quick start guide

4 En

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy

DVD movie playback in your home theater.

Prepare the following items.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speaker .....................................x 2

❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1

❏ Surround speaker ..............................x 2

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. Center speaker

❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cable .........................................x 5

❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor ..........................................x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable .............................................x 2

Select an RCA composite video cable.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center speaker

DVD player

Video monitor

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button

☞

P. 6

☞

P. 7

☞

P. 5

Preparation: Check the items

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 4 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Quick start guide

5 En

English

INTRODUCTION

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with

a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped

(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of

your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”

(black) terminals.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front and center speakers

Surround speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input

jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack of this unit.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

SURROUND

FRONT B

FRONT ACENTER

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

GND

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS DOCK

IN1 IN2

SURROUND

FRONT B

FRONT ACENTER

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

SPEAKERS

12 3 4

To the front

right speaker

To the front

left speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the center

speaker

To the surround

left speaker

To the surround

right speaker

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack

Subwoofer cable

Input jack

AV r ece iver

Subwoofer

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 5 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Quick start guide

6 En

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and the

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the video input

jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

4 Connect the power plug of this unit and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

SURROUND

FRONT B

FRONT ACENTER

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

GND

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS DOCK

IN1 IN2

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

VIDEO

DTV/CBL CDDVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC wall

outlets.

Digital coaxial

audio output jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

■ For further connections

• Using the other kind of speaker

combinations ☞ P. 11

• Connecting a video components ☞ P. 15

• Connecting a DVD player ☞ P. 16

• Connecting a DVD recorder ☞ P. 17

• Connecting a set-top boxes ☞ P. 17

• Connecting a CD player

and a CD recorder/ MD recorder ☞ P. 18

• Connecting a multi-format player

or an external decoder ☞ P. 18

• Connecting an Yamaha iPod/Bluetooth

dock ☞ P. 19

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front

panel ☞ P. 19

• Connecting an FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 20

• Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

☞ P. 46

• Connecting the SIRIUS Connect tuner

☞ P. 51

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video input

jack

VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jack

Video cable

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 6 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Quick start guide

7 En

English

INTRODUCTION

1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the

input source selector of the video monitor to

this unit.

2 Press

SCENE 1.

This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the

front panel display, and this unit automatically

optimize own status for the DVD playback.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while

this unit is in the SCENE mode.

3 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

4 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

When you change the input source or sound field program, the

SCENE mode is deactivated.

■ About SCENE function

Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this

unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field

program according to the SCENE template that has been

assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are

built combinations of input sources and sound field

programs.

If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the

SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the

component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of

the DVD player for further information.

■ The default assigned SCENE templates

You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in

advance. See page 17 for details.

You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this

unit in advance. See page 20 for details.

You must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See

pages 43 to 45 for tuning information.

To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected

AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the

indoor FM antenna.

You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE

buttons. See page 28 for details.

Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 21).

Note

Default

SCENE

button

The name of the SCENE template

and its description

SCENE

DVD Viewing

– input source: DVD

– sound field program: STRAIGHT

For when you want to enjoy a DVD playback.

SCENE

Disc Listening

– input source: DVD

– sound field program: 5ch Stereo

For when you want to listen to a music disc from

the connected DVD player as the background

music for this room.

SCENE

TV Viewing

– input source: DTV/CBL

– sound field program: STRAIGHT

For when you want to watch a TV program.

SCENE

Radio Listening

*2, *3, *4

– input source: TUNER

– sound field program: 5ch Enhancer

For when you want to listen to a music program

from the FM radio station.

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 7 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Quick start guide

8 En

■ After using this unit...

Press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode,

this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to

receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn

on this unit from the standby mode, press

STANDBY/

ON (or HPOWER). See page 21 for details.

What do you want to do with this

unit?

■ Customizing the SCENE templates

• Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 28

• Creating your original SCENE templates

☞ P. 31

■ Using various input sources

• Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 33

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 43

• Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs

☞ P. 46

• Enjoying SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs

☞ P. 51

• Using your iPod with this unit. ☞ P. 57

• Using your Bluetooth components

with this unit. ☞ P. 59

■ Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs

☞ P. 38

• Using the direct mode for the high

quality sound ☞ P. 41

• Customizing the sound field programs

☞ P. 40

■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

parameters for your listening room

(AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 24

• Manually adjusting various parameters of

this unit ☞ P. 61

• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 73

• Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 76

■ Additional features

Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 37

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 8 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Connections

9 En

English

PREPARATION

Connections

Rear panel

SURROUND

FRONT B

FRONT ACENTER

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

GND

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS DOCK

IN1 IN2

2 43 5 6 7

C0 BA9

(U.S.A. model)

Name Page

1 HDMI jacks 14

2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 13

3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 13

4 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 46

5 SIRIUS jack

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

6 DOCK terminal 19

7 Speaker terminals 11

8 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

9 AUDIO jacks 13

0 VIDEO jacks 13

A MULTI CH INPUT jacks 18

B SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 11

C ANTENNA terminals 20

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 9 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

10 En

Connections

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-

channel audio sources.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction

of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is

not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front

speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

80˚

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 10 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

11 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage

this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front

panel display when you turn on this unit.

• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit. For details about the

speaker impedance setting, see page 21.

SURROUND

FRONT B

FRONT ACENTER

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

GND

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS DOCK

IN1 IN2

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Center

speaker

Left

Right

FRONT B terminals

Connect the alternative front speaker system

(FRONT B).

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 11 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

12 En

Connections

■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS

terminal

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from the end of each speaker cable and then

twist the bare wires of the cable together to

prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKER terminals

1 Loosen the knob.

2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into

the hole on the terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Connecting the banana plug

(except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models)

The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector

widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 12 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

13 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. Optical input jacks are compatible with digital

signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.

• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

■ Video jacks

This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)

and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals transmitted on

separate wires of component video cables.

The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange)

(Yellow)

(Red) (Blue) (Green)

Notes

Note

PR PB YPR PB Y

Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

COMPONENT

VIDEO

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 13 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

14 En

Connections

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI

connection (see page 36).

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16

feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN DVD

or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack of this unit cannot be digitally

output at the HDMI OUT jack.

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/

CBL jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” (see page 67).

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the

AUDIO output jacks.

■ Video signal flow

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear

PCM

6ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by

HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

System) licensed by Digital Content Protection,

LLC.

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 14 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

15 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, or the

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or

on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack

of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND

MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 67).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI

connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the

TV monitor or projector via component, or video connection.

• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN DVD or

HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the

video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Connecting video components

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

-R

OUT

(REC)

OUTIN

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS

IN1 IN2

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

PR PB

TV (or projector)

Video in

Component

video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 15 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

16 En

Connections

• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those

made for your TV (see page 15).

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the

default component assigned to DIGITAL INPUT jack, select

the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL

IN” in “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” (see page 68).

■ Connecting a DVD player

Connecting other components

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS

IN1 IN2

DVD

AUDIO

DVD

COAXIAL

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

IN1

PR PB Y

DVD player

HDMI out

Component

video out

Video out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

(One for the video connection,

and one for the audio connection)

Coaxial out

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 16 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

17 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

■ Connecting a set-top box

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS

IN1 IN2

DVR

OUT

DVR

OUTIN

AUDIO

VIDEO

DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

PR PB Y

Video out

Audio out

Audio in

Video in

Component video out

DVD recorder,

PVR or VCR

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO

VIDEO

OUTPUT

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

XM SIRIUS

IN1 IN2

DTV/CBL

AUDIO

VIDEO

DTV/CBL

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

IN2

DTV/CBL

OPTICAL

L R

PR PB Y

Satellite receiver, cable TV

receiver or HDTV decoder

HDMI out Component video out

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

indicates recommended

connections

indicates alternative

connections

(One for the video connection,

and one for the audio

connection)

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 17 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

18 En

Connections

Connect the audio components as follows.

■ Connecting a CD player and a CD

recorder/MD recorder

• When you connect your CD player via analog and digital

connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL

INPUT jack.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the

default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack,

select the corresponding setting in “INPUT ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 68).

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for

discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks

on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 34), this unit automatically

turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

Connecting audio components

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

Notes

MONITOR

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

OUT

DTV/CBL DVRDVD

OUTIN

SURROUND

MULTI CH INP

AUDIO

VIDEO

FRONT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL CD

OUTDVD

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

IN1 IN2

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT

CD playerCD recorder or

MD recorder

Audio out

Optical out

Audio in

Audio out

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

L R LR

Subwoofer out

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Center out

Surround out

Front out

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 18 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

19 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth

adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a

Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the

DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its

dedicated cable.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit.

• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

• When audio signals are input at the AUDIO jacks, PORTABLE

jack and the DOCK terminal on the rear panel, the priority order

of the input signal is as follows:

1. DOCK

2. PORTABLE

3. AUDIO

Connecting a Yamaha iPod

™

universal dock or Bluetooth

™

adapter

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

DTV/CBL

DVR

GND

ANTENNA

XM SIRIUS DOCK

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock

or Bluetooth adapter

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

Notes

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY/

A/B/OFF

BAND

INFO

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

OPTIMIZER MIC

AUDIO SELECT

DIRECTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

l INPUT hl PROGRAM h

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

PORTABLE

PRESET/TUNING/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

Game console or

video camera

Audio

output

Video

output

Audio

output

3.5 mm stereo

mini plug

Portable audio

player

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 19 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

20 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

See right for connection information of the supplied AM loop

antenna.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different

depending on the models.

Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable

into the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

CENTE

SUB

WOOFER

PUT

GND

UNBAL.

ANTENNA

DOCK

GND

UNBAL.

ANTENNA

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna

GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33

ft) vinyl-covered wire

extended outdoors from a

window.

(U.S.A. model)

Note

Connecting the power cable

Open the lever

Insert

Close the lever

(U.S.A. model)

Power cable

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 20 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

21 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

1 Press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel to

set this unit to the standby mode.

Refer to the right column for details.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

STANDBY/ON to turn on this

unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

PROGRAM l / h to select “SP

IMP.”.

“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting

(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“6Ω MIN”.

5 Press

STANDBY/ON to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

STANDBY/ON (or

POWER) to turn

on this unit.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Set this unit to the standby mode

Press

STANDBY/ON (or

STANDBY) to set

this unit to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.

Note

TONE CONTROL

STANDBY

/ON

While holding

down

Turning on and off the power

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 21 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

22 En

Connections

The XM and SIRIUS indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator or

SIRIUS indicator lights up only when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source.

1 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 14).

2 DOCK indicator

• Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see

page 19) and V-AUX is selected as the input source.

• Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor

(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth

component is in the paring (see page 59) or the

Bluetooth adaptor is searching the Bluetooth

component (see page 59).

• Lights up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth

adaptor is connected to the Bluetooth component (see

page 19).

3 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

selected (see page 38).

4 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

5 YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 24).

6 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite

Radio or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode (see

pages 43 to 56).

7 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator

• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function

is on (see page 35).

• Indicates the current volume level.

8 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

9 Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

0 Headphone indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 35).

A SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers activated

(see page 33).

SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.

SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.

Front panel display

Note

MUTE

VOL.

neural

PCM

VIRTUAL

AUTO

YPAO

MEMORY

TUNED

STEREO

HOLD

SLEEP

MULTI CH

DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

DOCK ENHANCER

SILENT

CINEMA

LFE

LL C R

SL SR

DIGITAL

EDCA B098

1234567

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 22 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

23 En

Connections

English

PREPARATION

B CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 39).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 39).

SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a

sound field program is selected (see page 39).

C Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

D SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 37).

E Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup

procedure (see page 24) or the speaker level setting

procedure in the “SP LEVEL” (see page 65).

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 75.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Input channel indicators

LFE

LL C R

SL SR

LFE indicator

Notes

30º 30º

Approximately

6 m (20 ft)

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 23 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

24 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears

in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the

OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure of the following check points.

Before starting the automatic setup, check the following

check points.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏ This unit is selected as the video input source of

the video monitor.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front

speaker system (see page 33).

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

The following display appears in the OSD.

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the microphone heading

upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be

when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the

attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone

to the tripod (etc.).

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

Note

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

INFO

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

OPTIMIZER MIC

AUDIO SELECT

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

Optimizer

microphone

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

. START

Automatic

Processing

of all item

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

Optimizer microphone

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 24 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

25 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

English

PREPARATION

4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO”

and the pointer is pointing at “START”.

You can also select the following setup methods. In this

case, press

k to select “SETUP”, press

l / h to

select the one of the following choices and then select

“START”.

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the previous

settings.

• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”

settings and restore the previous settings.

• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”

parameters to the initial factory settings.

“RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have

previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

5 Press

n to select “START” and then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

The following message appears in the OSD.

6 Press

ENTER to start the setup

procedure.

This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test

tones are output from each speaker during the auto

setup procedure. Once all items are set, the result

display appears in the OSD.

• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in

the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes

for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.

This unit performs the following checks:

Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the

volume level of each speaker.

Speaker distance DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Speaker size SIZE

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Note

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure. For more accurate

measurements, keep quiet and move to the wall where

speakers are not around. We recommend that you leave

the listening room during the automatic setup

procedure.

NOTICE

output. 

Loudtesttonesare

 



Pleasekeepquiet

orleavetheroom.

Press[ENTER]

Notes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 25 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

26 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

The display changes as follows.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in

the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening position

in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level

• If “E-9:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 4.

• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, the

setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For

details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 27.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO

SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning

messages appears (see page 27).

7 Press

k and

ENTER to display the

setup results in detail.

8 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 61).

The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be

longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your speakers.

9 Press

ENTER to return to the result

display.

Notes

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

. START

Automatic

Processing

of all item

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Start

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

SP : 3/2/0.1

DIST: 3.2/3.5m

LVL : -2/+2dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

INITIALIZING

. WIRING/LEVEL

DISTANCE

SIZE 

WAITING;;;

;;;;;;;;;;

[]:Exit

[

AUTO SETUP

Note

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the speaker

size

Results of the speaker

output level

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/2/0.1

DIST: 3.2/3.5m

LVL : -2/+2dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Detail

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 26 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

27 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

English

PREPARATION

10 Press

n and then press

l / h to select

“SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

11 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

12 Press

MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

13 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from

this unit.

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it

away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top

of this unit.

If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate

your system.

■ If an error screen appears

Press

k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or

“EXIT” and then press

ENTER.

The following display is an example where “E-8:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

result display. Check the warning messages to correct your

speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press

ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 84.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “–

–” is displayed instead.

3 Press

ENTER to return to the result

display.

SET MENU

TOP MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

ERROR

. E-8:USER CANCEL

Can't detect

signal at MIC

RETRY EXIT

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

Note

AUTO SETUP

. WARNING(2)

RESULT

SP : 3/2/0.1

DIST: 3.2/3.5m

LVL : -2/+2dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Detail

WARNING

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Reverse channel

AAAAFLAAAAA---

AAACENTER

AAAASLAAAAA---

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 27 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES

28 En

This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for

various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory

setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to

each SCENE button:

SCENE 1: DVD Viewing

SCENE 2: Disc Listening

SCENE 3: TV Viewing

SCENE 4: Radio Listening

If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select

the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template

library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE

buttons on the front panel and the remote control.

1 Press and hold the desired

SCENE (or

SCENE) button for 3 seconds.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the

front panel starts to flash, and the name of the

currently assigned SCENE template appears in the

front panel display.

2 Press

INPUT l / h (or press

AMP and

then press

l / h) to select the desired

template.

3 Press the

SCENE (or

SCENE) button

again to confirm the selection.

The selected SCENE template is assigned to the

button.

Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 32

for details.

Selecting the SCENE templates

Selecting the desired SCENE

template

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the

SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

DVD Viewing

Remote control

Flashes

3 seconds

Front panel

Note

l INPUT h

AMP

ENTER

DVD MovieView

Front panel

Remote control

Remote controlFront panel

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 28 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

29 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

English

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?

* When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit

plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.

You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 31 for details.

Note

Radio Listening

CD Hi-fi Listening

CD Listening

CD Music Listening

XM Listening

Dock Listening

DVD Live Viewing

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD Viewing

Disc Hi-fi Listening

Music Disc Listening

Disc Listening

DVR Viewing

TV Viewing

Game Playing

DVD

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

TUNER (FM/AM)

DOCK

DVD

DVR

Video sources

(DVD video,

Recorded video)

TV programs

Video games

iPod or Bluetooth

component

Radio programs

Music discs (CD, SACD

or DVD-Audio)

SCENE templates

Which component do you

like for playback?

Which source do you like to

play back?

Default

SCENE buttons

TV Sports Viewing

SIRIUS SIRIUS Listening

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 29 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

30 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions

The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.

SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features

DVD Viewing

DVD STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you play back general

contents on the DVD player.

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD MOVIE

Movie Dramatic

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your DVD player.

DVD Live Viewing

DVD MUSIC

Pop/Rock

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live

video on your DVD player.

DVR Viewing

DVR MOVIE

Movie Dramatic

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your digital video recorder.

Disc Hi-fi Listening

DVD DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity

sound of the music discs on your DVD player.

Music Disc

Listening

DVD STEREO

2ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs

on your DVD player.

Disc Listening

DVD STEREO

5ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

sources on your DVD player as the background music.

CD Hi-fi Listening

CD DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity

sound of the music discs on your CD player.

CD Listening

CD STEREO

5ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs

on your CD player as the background music.

CD Music Listening

CD STEREO

2ch Stereo

Select this SCENE template when you play back music source

on your CD player.

Radio Listening

TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio

programs.

XM Listening

XM MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite

Radio programs.

SIRIUS Listening

SIRIUS MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy SIRIUS Satellite

Radio programs.

Dock Listening

DOCK MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you play back music on

your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth

adapter.

TV Viewing

DTV/CBL STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general

programs on your TV.

TV Sports Viewing

DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs

on your TV.

Game Playing

V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT

Game

Select this SCENE template when you play video games.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 30 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

31 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can create your original SCENE templates for each

SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE

templates to create the original SCENE templates.

■ Customizing the preset SCENE

templates

Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press and hold the desired

SCENE button

for 3 seconds.

The SCENE template customizing screen appears on

the video monitor.

When the SCENE template you want to customize is not

assigned to any of the

SCENE buttons, press

AMP

and then press

l / h repeatedly to recall the desired

SCENE template on the menu screen.

3 Press

AMP and then

k / n to select the

desired parameter of the SCENE template

and then

l / h to select the desired value

of the selected parameter.

You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE

template:

• INPUT: The input source component

• MODE: The active sound field programs,

STRAIGHT or DIRECT mode (see

pages 39 and 41)

• NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see

page 42)

− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening

mode.

− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the

CINEMA mode.

− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the

MUSIC mode.

4 Press the

SCENE button again to confirm

the edit.

An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE

template.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding

SCENE buttons, you may need to set the

input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 32 for details.

• You can create a customized SCENE template for each

SCENE button, and if you create another customized

SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized

SCENE template with the new one.

• The newly created template is only available for the assigned

SCENE button.

■ Renaming the SCENE templates

Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3

of “Customizing the preset SCENE templates”

and then press

ENTER.

• Press

k / n to select the desired character.

•Press

l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the

space or the desired character.

• Press

RETURN to cancel the new name.

• Press

ENTER to confirm the new name.

Creating your original SCENE

templates

Note

: DVD Viewing

: DVD

SCENE

INPUT

SCENE : DVD Viewing

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select a SCENE template

Assign to the SCENE

button

Create the original SCENE

template

3 seconds

Notes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 31 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

32 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Controlling the input source

components in the SCENE mode

You can operate both this unit and the input source

component by using the remote control. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 75).

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below

to control the input source component of the

selected SCENE template.

These buttons control the input source component. See page 74

for details of the function of each button.

■ Setting input source of the customized

SCENE template on the remote control

If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE

template, you must set the input source of the SCENE

template on the remote control to operate the input source

component correctly.

Press and hold the

SCENE button and the

desired input selector button (

) for 3 seconds.

Press the

SCENE button again to operate the input source

component.

Using remote control on the SCENE feature

Note

REC

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

STRAIGHT DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AXMSIRIUS

INFO

SCENE buttons

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 32 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

PLAYBACK

33 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the

front speakers you want to use.

The respective speaker indicators lights up in the

front panel display.

3 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

one of the input selector buttons (

)) to

select the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.

4 Start playback on the selected component or

select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 43 for details about FM/AM tuning

instructions.

• See page 46 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instructions.

• See page 51 for details about SIRIUS Satellite

Radio tuning instructions.

5 Rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the

desired output level.

6 Press

PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or

press

AMP and then

PROG l / h

repeatedly) to select the desired sound field

program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display.

See page 38 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 34).

• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48

kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 39).

• To display information about the currently selected input source

in the OSD, see page 36 for details.

■ A quick guide to contents

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

Basic operations

MULTI CH

DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

INPUT:DVD

Currently selected input

source

Available input sources

Notes

When you want to...

See

page

Enjoy high quality sound 41

Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 41

Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 40

Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 42

Use headphones 35

Select a decoder to play back sources with 39

Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 37

Movie Dramatic

Currently selected

surround field program

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 33 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

34 En

Playback

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input

jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the

same input source.

• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”

in most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 71).

Press

AUDIO SELECT (or press

AMP and

then

AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the

desired audio input jack select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jacks

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,

HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when

the HDMI IN DVD and HDMI IN DTV/CBL jacks are not used.

Use “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign

the respective input jack (see page 68).

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 18) as the input

source.

Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

AMP and then

MULTI CH IN) to select

MULTI CH.

“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.

Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 69).

The input signals are amplified and output directly without sound

processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field programs,

the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is selected as the

input source.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUDIO SELECT Function

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital

signals (3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Selects only digital signals. When no

signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

MULTI CH

DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

A.SEL:AUTO

Currently selected audio input jack select setting

Available input sources

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 34 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

35 En

Playback

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

DISPLAY.

The current status screen appears in the OSD.

You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 70).

The OSD signal is not output at the DVR VIDEO OUT jacks and

will not be recorded.

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

is automatically activated (see page 39).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Press

MUTE to mute the audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME or press

VOLUME +/– to

resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 66).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

Displaying the current status of

this unit on a video monitor

Note



[DISPLAY]:STATUSOFF

 



NIGHT:CINEMA(MID)

A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD

MovieSpacious

MOVIE

DVDMovieViewing

STATUSVOL:-40dB

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 35 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

36 En

Playback

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (

) control to

select a video source and then an audio source.

• You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see

page 34). Press

AMP and then press

MULTI CH IN.

• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input

source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 69).

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Press

AMP and then

MENU.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press

l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information displays.

4 Press

MENU again to exit from “SET

MENU”.

■ Audio information

“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

■ Video information

“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

HDMI error and message

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Displaying the input source

information

Audio sources

Video sources

DVD

V-AU X

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

XM SIRIUS

DVD

SET MENU

TOP MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

Information Descriptions

FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or

PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders.

Note

Information Descriptions

HDMI SIGNAL

Type of the source video signals and the

video signals output at the HDMI OUT

jack of this unit.

HDMI RES.

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or

output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this

unit.

HDMI ERROR

(Only when error

is detected)

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices. See “HDMI

error and message” for details.

Note

Message Cause

DEVICE OVER

The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

HDCP ERROR

HDCP authentication failed.

OUT OF RES.

The connected monitor is not compatible

with the resolution of the input video signal.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 36 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

37 En

Playback

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time.

Press

AMP and then press

SLEEP

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is

set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound field

program.

• To cancel the sleep timer, press

AMP and then press

SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF

” appears in the front

panel display.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY/ON (or

STANDBY) to set this unit to the

standby mode.

Using the sleep timer

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 37 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

38 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital

decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback

from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.

Press

PROGRAM l / h (or press

AMP and

then press

PROG l / h repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 34).

• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48

kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 39).

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

not merely on the name of the program itself.

The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the

actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each

direction.

Sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Category Program Features

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live

concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis

on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm

instruments.

Hall

CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The

program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and

beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.

Jazz

CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data

collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.

ENTERTAINMENT

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play

games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the

field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes

of movies.

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows

with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and

announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread

around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.

MOVIE

Movie Spacious

CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on

spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a

wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.

Movie Dramatic

CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on

three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but

reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with

clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots.

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.

5ch Stereo

CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is

a sound field suitable for background music at parties.

MUSIC

ENHANCER

2ch Enhancer

5ch Enhancer

Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in

2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by

regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact.

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 38 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

39 En

Sound field programs

English

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the

standard decoders

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multi-channels.

Press

AMP and then press

QSUR. DECODE

repeatedly to select a decoder.

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers by creating

virtual speakers.

If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 64),

Virtual CINEMA DSP is automatically activated

whenever you select a CINEMA DSP program

(see page 38).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when

“SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 64) in the following

cases:

– when “5ch Stereo” (see page 38) is selected.

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

is automatically activated whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP sound field programs (except for 5ch

Stereo) (see page 38). When activated, the SILENT

CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display.

■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decoding mode)

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode,

multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the

appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only

the front left and right speakers.

Press

STRAIGHT (or press

AMP and then

press

STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.

To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press

STRAIGHT (or press

AMP and then

STRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears

from the front panel display.

Decoder Functions

Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

music sources

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

game sources

Neural Sur.

Neural Surround processing for any

sources

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 39 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

40 En

Sound field programs

■ Editing sound fields parameters

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1 While listening to a source, press

AMP

and then press

PARAMETER.

2 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

you want to change.

3 Press

l / h to change the parameter

value.

You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”

in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 70).

Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,

Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:

DSP level DSP LEVEL

Function: Adjusts the effect level.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

For 2ch Enhancer and 5ch Enhancer:

Effect level EFFECT LEVEL

Function: Adjusts the effect level.

Choices: LOW, HIGH

For Pro Logic II Music:

Panorama PANORAMA

Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround

speakers as well as the front speakers for

a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

Dimension DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either

towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the

front), initial setting is STD (standard).

Center width CT WIDTH

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three

front speakers to varying degrees. A

larger value adjusts the center image

towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only

from center speaker) to 7 (center channel

sound is output only from front left and

right speakers), initial setting is 3.

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 40 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

USING AUDIO FEATURES

41 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Use the DIRECT mode to enjoy the high quality sounds of

the selected source. When the DIRECT mode is activated,

this unit plays back the selected source with the least

circuitry.

Press

NDIRECT

(or press

AMP and then

DIRECT) to select

“DIRECT”.

• “TONE CONTROL” and “SOUND MENU” (see page 63)

settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective.

• The front panel display automatically dims.

While DIRECT mode is activated, the front panel display turns on

momentarily when an operation is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front left and right speaker channels.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to

select the high-frequency response

(TREBLE) or the low-frequency response

(BASS).

2 Press

PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to

adjust the high-frequency response

(TREBLE) or the low-frequency response

(BASS).

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when this unit is in the

DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input

source.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 24) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 65).

1 Press

AMP and then press

LEVEL on

the remote control and then

k / n to select

the speaker you want to adjust.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

• When the video monitor is turned on, the “SPEAKER

LEVEL” adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

• Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

3 Press

LEVEL to turn off the speaker level

adjustment display.

Using audio features

Enjoying high quality sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 41 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

42 En

Using audio features

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night.

1 Press

AMP and then

NIGHT repeatedly

to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the effect level while

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is

displayed in the front panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:

– when the DIRECT mode (see page 41) is selected.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 34).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Selecting the night listening mode

Notes

Effect.Lvl:MID

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 42 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

FM/AM TUNING

43 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Press

OINPUT

l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

CBAND

to select the reception band

(FM or AM).

3 Press

HTUNING AUTO/MAN’L

so that the

AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,

automatic tuning is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h once

to begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Press

OINPUT

l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

CBAND

to select the reception band

(FM or AM).

3 Press

HTUNING AUTO/MAN’L

so that the

AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,

manual tuning is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h to

tune into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Automatic tuning

AUTO

AFM 88.9 MHz

Lights up

No colon (:)

TUNED

AFM 88.9 MHz

Lights up

Manual tuning

Note

AFM 88.9 MHz

No colon (:)

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 43 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

44 En

FM/AM tuning

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8

preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station

groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press

OINPUT

l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

CBAND

to select “FM” as the

reception band.

3 Press and hold

FMEMORY

for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

You can select the preset station group and the preset station

number where the first received station will be stored by pressing

DA/B/C/D/E

and then

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See page 43 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

FMEMORY

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

3 Press

DA/B/C/D/E

and

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h repeatedly

to select a preset station group (A1 to E8)

while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press

FMEMORY

while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

Automatic preset tuning

Notes

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

Manual preset tuning

Notes

MEMORY

A3:FM 88.9 MHz

Preset station

group and

number

Flashes

Colon (:)

TUNED

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 44 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

45 En

FM/AM tuning

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, press

4TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press

DA/B/C/D/E

(or

8A-E/CAT.

l / h)

repeatedly to select the desired preset

station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n) to select the desired

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly

by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

DA/B/C/D/E

and

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.

2 Press and hold

BPRESET/TUNING

for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

DA/B/C/D/E

and

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press

BPRESET/TUNING

again.

“EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel

display and the assignments of the two preset stations

are exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

E1:FM 88.9 MHz

Exchanging preset station

MEMORY

E1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

MEMORY

A5:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 45 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

46 En

XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio,

stand-up comedy, children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio quality from

coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.

For details, see the operating instructions provided with

XM Mini-Tuner Dock.

To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “XM RADIO SET” screen

in the video monitor (see page 72) to check the antenna reception

level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in

the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna,

Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not correct (see page 82).

XM Satellite Radio tuning

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note

XM READY

legal disclaimer

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM

service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees

and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XM-RADIO (US

residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial- free channels and

advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject

to Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.com (US residents) and www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available

property of their respective owners.

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

CENTE

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

GND

UNBAL.

ANTENNA

XM SIRIUS DOCK

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Dock

(sold separately)

Note

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 46 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

47 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM

Mini-Tuner Dock to your XM Ready

home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:

on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,

and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO

(1-800-967-2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will

send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup.

Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy

periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio

system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel

lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For

more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web

at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at

1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

1 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the

XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 78 for appropriate

remedies.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 48.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 48.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 48.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct Number Access

mode” on page 48.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD

surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in

multi-channels (see page 39).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 49).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display or in the OSD (see page 50).

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

Notes

MULTI CH

DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

001Preview

Lights up

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 47 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

48 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Before performing operations, press 3XM to select “XM” as the

input source.

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

BSEARCH MODE

(or

MSRCH

MODE

) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n).

• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front

panel display, select channel “0”.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

BSEARCH MODE

(or

MSRCH

MODE

) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

DCATEGORY

(or

8A-E/CAT.

l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”

on page 49.

All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial

factory setting.

1 Press

BSEARCH MODE

(or

MSRCH

MODE

) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

DCATEGORY

(or

8A-E/CAT.

l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press

MSRCH MODE

repeatedly to select

“ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) and then press

TENT

to confirm the

input number. Instead of pressing

TENT

to tune into the

channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or

TENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

1 2 3

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM>123

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 48 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

49 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 48.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 47 for details.

2 Press

FMEMORY

(or

9MEMORY

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

DCATEGORY

(or

8A-E/CAT.

l / h)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

4 Press

EPRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

8PRESET/CH

k / n) repeatedly to select a

preset channel number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

FMEMORY

(or

9MEMORY

) to set

the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a

preset channel while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in

the same preset channel group and number is cleared.

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset

channels

Note

043XMU

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

Note

MEMORY

C- 043XMU

Selected preset channel group

Flashes

MEMORY

C5 043XMU

Selected preset channel number

Flashes

C5:043XMU

Colon (:)

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 49 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

50 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 82 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

INFO (or

INFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

When the channel number / name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 70).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• To hold the current XM Raido information, press

ENTER on

the remote control while it is being displayed. Press

ENTER

again to release the held information.

• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cannot receive

the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press

ODISPLAY

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (see page 48)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Channel number/name

[5] Artist name

• To turn off the OSD, press

ODISPLAY

again.

• XM status messages also appear in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the

“OSD-SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 70).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER

on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD.

The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while

you are holding the XM information. Press

ENTER again or

change the XM Satellite Radio channel to release the held

information.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

Channel number/name

Channel category

Artist name/song title

[043] XMU

<CAT>ROCK

Coldplay / Clo

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM : 043

CHAN : XMU

CAT : Rock

NAME : Coldplay

TITLE : Speed of sound

.(Spe / Coldplay)

[ ]/[ ]: CHANNEL

[ ]/[ ]: CATEGORY

[

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 50 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ TUNING

51 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only

SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today's hits to R&B, oldies and classical masterpieces. From

authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100%

commercial-free.

SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your

subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games

are broadcast during their respective seasons.)

Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don’t forget a host of other

great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more

information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed

at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The

orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs

depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals

supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or

“SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see

page 56) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the

orientation of the antenna.

• You will need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall

outlet.

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in

the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect

tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the

connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (see

page 83).

• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this

unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

SIRIUS Satellite Radio

legal disclaimer

SIRIUS is available in the U.S. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S. and is available in Canada for subscribers with

a Canadian address. To get SIRIUS Satellite Radio, a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required (sold separately).

Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Connecting the SiriusConnect

™

tuner

DTV/CBL

ANTENNA

XM SIRIUS DOCK

SIRIUS

SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna

(sold separately)

To the AC wall outlet

Notes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 51 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

52 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite feature, you need to

activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription, you need the Sirius ID, which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Channel “0” (see below).

■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

1 Press

SIRIUS.

2 Press

0 and then

ENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”

indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect

tuner) appears in the front panel display.

To scroll the message again, press

INFO (or

INFO).

Write the Sirius ID below.

1 Press

INPUT l / h (or press

SIRIUS)

to select “SIRIUS” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights

up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio information (such as channel number, channel

name, category, artist name, or song title) for the

currently selected channel appears in the front panel

display.

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you

can only select “184” or “000”.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 53.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 53.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 53.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct Number Access

mode” on page 53.

• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels

(see page 54).

• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in

the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 56).

Activating SIRIUS Satellite

Radio

™

subscription

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

ID:

Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio

™

operations

Notes

MULTI CH

DVR

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

DVD CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER SIRIUS

184 SIRIUS Wea

Lights up

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 52 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

53 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

English

BASIC

OPERATION

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

•

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH

(or

PRESET/CH

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by

pressing

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

This unit skips the channels when this unit is All Channel Search

mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not

malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is locked (see page 54).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” on

page 54.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (

) as shown below.

• To display the SIRIUS Radio ID (SID) number displayed in the

front panel display, select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (

) on the remote control and then press

ENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing

ENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (

) or

ENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:____” appears in the

front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code

number by using the numeric buttons (

) or press

ENT to

cancel.

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS.

Note

1 2 3

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 53 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

54 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 53.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” on

page 52 for details.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

MEMORY (or

MEMORY) to set

the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

as a preset channel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in

the same preset channel group and number is cleared.

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or

PRESET/CH k / n).

■ Setting the code number and the locked

channels

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1 Press

AMP on the remote control and then

press

MENU to display.

2 Press

n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and

then press

ENTER.

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS.

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio

™

preset channels

Note

001 SIRIUS Hit

Currently selected channel number

MEMORY

Flashes

MEMORY

A-023 Hair N

Currently selected preset channel group

Flashes

Note

Setting the Parental Lock

MEMORY

A1023 Hair Na

Currently selected preset channel number

FlashesFlashes

A1:023 Hair Na

Colon (:)

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 54 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

55 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

English

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Press

n repeatedly to select “OPTION

MENU” and then press

ENTER.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “G)SIRIUS

SET” and then press

ENTER.

The following menu screen appears.

5 Press

ENTER.

“NEW PIN:0000” appears.

If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit, “Not

Available” appears.

If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___”

appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to step 8 and

then proceed the operations.

6 Enter the desired 4-digit code number by

using the numeric buttons (

Press

RETURN to return the previous menu level

without setting the code number.

7 Press

ENTER to confirm the code number.

“OK” appears and then “PIN:___” appears.

8 Enter the 4-digit code number you set at step

6 above to unlock the protection.

When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears.

9 Press

l / h repeatedly to select the

desired channel category and then press

k / n repeatedly to select the channel you

want to lock.

In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit

outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel

is locked. Only the first eight characters of each channel

name are displayed in the list.

10 Press

ENTER to lock the selected

channel.

Check mark appears before the selected channel.

When you select the locked channel and press

ENTER,

this unit unlocks the selected channel.

11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to lock the channels

you want.

12 Press

RETURN repeatedly to exit from the

“PARENTAL LOCK” screen.

13 Press

MENU to exit from the setup menu.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is

locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather

& Emergency” or “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx”

(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner).

If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,

use “SSR PIN” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to reset the Parental

Lock code number.

■ Tuning into the locked channels

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct

number access mode or preset channel mode. When you

tune into the locked channel, following message appears

in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set

for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons

(

) or press

ENT to cancel the tuning.

If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the

front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

Note

3 OPTION MENU

G)SIRIUS SET

. PARENTAL LOCK

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[p]/[[]:Select

[

PARENTAL LOCK

NEWPIN:0000

[0] [9]:NUMBER

[ENT]:ENTER

Note

PIN:

____

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 55 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

56 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category, artist

name, composer name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” section

in “Troubleshooting” on page 83 for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

INFO (or

INFO) repeatedly to toggle

between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information display modes.

Back to “CHANNEL INFO”

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 70).

• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character

that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER while it is being displayed.

■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press

INFO (or

DISPLAY).

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (see page 52)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Composer name

[5] Antenna reception level

[6] Channel number/name

[7] Artist name

• To turn off the OSD, press

DISPLAY again.

• SIRIUS status messages also appear in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the

“OSD-SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 70).

• To hold the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press

ENTER while it is being displayed in the OSD. While this

unit is holding the information screen, “HOLD” appears in the

OSD.

• The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while

you are holding the SIRIUS information. Press

ENTER

again or change the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to release

the held information. When an information is unavailable,

“––––” appears.

Before performing the following operations, press

SIRIUS.

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Note

CHANNEL INFO

e.g.) 008 Big '80s

Channel number/name

CATEGORY INFO

e.g.) Pop

Channel category

SONG INFO

e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa

Artist name / Song title

COMPOSER INFO

e.g.) Frankie Zipper

Composer name

ANTENNA INFO

e.g.) 043 ANTENNA

Channel number/Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

e.g.) 5ch Enhancer

Sound field program

SIRIUSInformationANT:

ALLCHSEARCH

008:Big'80s

:Pop

:Sanumemo

:RoadtoIndia

C:FrankieZipper

[1]

[2]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[4]

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 56 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

USING IPOD™

57 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 19), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You

can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts

(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 19).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 85.

• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with

the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Remote control operation ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod

(some models only).

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Before performing the following operations, press

V-AUX/DOCK.

Button Function

8 ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

0 ll Search backward (Press and hold)

Search forward

(Press and hold)

b Skip backward

a Skip forward

e Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

p Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

M MENU Previous menu

O DISPLAY Display

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 57 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

58 En

Using iPod™

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control when you connect this

unit and a monitor using the VIDEO connection. You can

browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further,

you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit

your personal preferences.

• The name of the song being played also appears in the front

panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 70).

• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play

information is displayed in the OSD by using the

“OSD-SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70)

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in

the OSD. Press

ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the

“Settings” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

1 Press

V-AUX/DOCK and then

ODISPLAY

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod

menu and then press

ENTER to begin

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” appears

in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “ ”

appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of

songs are being repeated.

■ The function of the play information

display

[1] Playback status

[2] Track number/total tracks

[3] Artist name

[4] Song title

[5] Progress bar

[6] Elapsed time

[7] Shuffle and repeat icons

[8] (playback), (pausing), (search

forward) and (search backward)

[9] Name of the album

[10] Remaining time

Notes

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

1 All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

[2]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 58 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS

59 En

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and

enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between

this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your

Bluetooth component in advance.

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth

component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this

unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been

deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a

Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.

• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you

use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other

component with which Bluetooth communications are to be

established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s

operating instructions.

There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START

PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.

■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”

Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.

Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See

page 71 for details.

■ Quick pairing

1 Press

OINPUT l

/ h repeatedly (or press

V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the

input source.

2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with.

3 Press and hold

CBAND

(or

BAND) for 3

seconds to start pairing.

Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,

“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the

Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK

indicator flashes in the front panel display.

To cancel the pairing, press

CBAND

(or

BAND) again.

If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front

panel display.

4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth adapter.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in

the Bluetooth device list.

5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth

device list and then enter the pass key

“0000” on the Bluetooth component.

When the pairing procedure is successful,

“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight

Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the

pairing data for the least recently used other component is

cleared.

1 Press

OINPUT l

/ h repeatedly (or press

V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the

input source.

2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.

When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the

Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the

DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.

• When you press

ENTER, the connected Bluetooth adapter

searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth

component. If the Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth

component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth

component, press

RETURN.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter

and your Bluetooth component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the

pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully

understand all the instructions before starting.

Note

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 59 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

RECORDING

60 En

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 41) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 41) and the sound field programs (see page 38) do

not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if

your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is

turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

one of the input selector buttons (4)) to

select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 60 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

SET MENU

61 En

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 24).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

SET MENU

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B

terminals.

B)SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)CENTER GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.

H)HDMI SET

Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Parameter Features Page

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

C)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each input source.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the

rear panel of this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 61 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

62 En

SET MENU

Option menu 3 OPTION MENU

The “XM RADIO SET” and “SIRIUS SET” parameters are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 36).

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Press

AMP and then press

MENU to

enter “SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press

ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

4 Press

k / n / l / h and

ENTER to select

and change the parameter.

•Press

k / n to select the desired menu or

parameter.

•Press

l / h to change the parameter value.

•Press

ENTER to enter the selected menu or to

confirm the parameter.

•Press

RETURN to return to the previous menu

level.

5 Press

MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the XM and iPod

information is displayed.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the

DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

D)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

E)BLUETOOTH SET

Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a

Bluetooth component (see page 59).

F)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals.

G)SIRIUS SET

Sets the SIRIUS Parental Lock code number and the channel lock configuration (see

page 54).

Note

Using SET MENU

SET MENU

TOPAMENU

.;AUTO SETUP

.A;MANUAL SETUP

;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

TOPAMENU

;AUTO SETUP

.A;MANUAL SETUP

;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

. 1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 62 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

63 En

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the FRONT B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the FRONT B

terminals are set in the main zone.

• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the

FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If

SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is

turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at

the FRONT B terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B

terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to

“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode (see page 39).

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

When the front speakers are large

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the front speakers are small

Select “SMALL” (small).

When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 64), you

can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of

“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,

this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the center speaker is large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the center speaker is small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

1 SOUND MENU

Notes

;MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 1/2

. A)SPEAKER SET

B)SP LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)CENTER GEQ

E)LFE LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 2/2

. F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET

H)HDMI SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT B;;;;FRONT

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:

large

Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm

(6.5 in): small

Note

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT SP

SMALL >LARGE

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

CENTER SP

NONE >SML LRG

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 63 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

64 En

SET MENU

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the surround speakers are large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the surround speakers are small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the surround speakers

Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39).

LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get natural bass sound

Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well

as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get rich bass sound

Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of

any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE

signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to

the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front

left and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting (see page 63).

When you do not use a subwoofer

Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-

frequency signals of the front left and right channels,

and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left

and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”

setting (see page 63).

Crossover CROSSOVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER

SET” (see page 63). All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or front speakers

depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see page 63).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

SUR. L/R SP

NONE >SML LRG

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR FRNT>BOTH

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

CROSSOVER

FREQ;;;80Hz

1 SOUND MENU

A)SPEAKER SET

SUBWOOFER PHASE

>NORMAL REVERSE

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 64 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

65 En

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each

speaker.

Control range: –10 to +10 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of

the speakers.

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)

SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of

the speakers.

SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker

FR.L

Front left speaker

FR.R

Front right speaker

CNTR

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

Note

1 SOUND MENU

B)SP LEVEL 1/2

__________

. FR.L

FR.R

CNTR

SWFR

1 SOUND MENU

B)SP LEVEL 2/2

__________

.SUR.L

SUR.R

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

Note

1 SOUND MENU

C)SP DISTANCE 1/2

. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONT L;;;10.0ft

FRONT R;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;;8.5ft

SWFR;;;;;;10.0ft

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[

1 SOUND MENU

C)SP DISTANCE 2/2

. SUR. L;;;;;8.0ft

SUR. R;;;;;8.0ft

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 65 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

66 En

SET MENU

■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band

(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You

can make adjustments while listening to the currently

selected source component or a test tone.

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

Test tone

TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”

while listening to a test tone.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and

front left speakers.

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input

signal contains the LFE channel.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker

SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 64),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Speaker

SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone compression.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Mute type MUTE TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 35).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay A.DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Note

1 SOUND MENU

D)CENTER GEQ

TEST >OFF ON

. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

E)LFE LEVEL

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

1 SOUND MENU

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

. SPEAKER;;;;;;MAX

HEADPHONE;;;;MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

1 SOUND MENU

G)AUDIO SET

. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

MAX VOL.;;;+16dB

INIT.VOL.;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

1 SOUND MENU

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 66 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

67 En

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This

feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by

mistake. For example, the original volume range is +16 dB

to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB,

the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB.

Control range: +16 dB, +10 dB to –30 dB

Control step: 5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume”

setting. For example, if “INIT.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX

VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to

–30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.

Initial volume INIT.VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of

this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, MUTE, –80 dB to +16 dB

Control step: 1 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.”

setting.

■ HDMI set H)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio S.AUDIO

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI

audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component

connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI

input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned

on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other”.

• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the

connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of

each connected component.

Note

Choice Functions

RX-V463

Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The

HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input

jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on

the rear panel of this unit.

Other

Plays back HDMI audio signals on another

HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Notes

H)HDMI SET

SUPPORT AUDIO:

RX-V463

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

[ENTER]:Return

1 SOUND MENU

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 67 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

68 En

SET MENU

Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the

decoder mode or rename the input source.

■ Input assignment

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the

component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do

not correspond to your needs. Change the following

parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using

OINPUT

l / h (or

the input selector buttons (

)).

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1

COAXIAL IN (1)

Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3

OPTICAL IN (2)

OPTICAL IN (3)

Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR

(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR

You cannot select a specific item more than once.

For HDMI jacks 1 and 2

HDMI IN [1]

HDMI IN [2]

Choices: (1) DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

(2) DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons (

)

MULTI CH IN to select the input

source you want to change the name of.

2 Press

AMP and then press

l / h on the

remote control to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

3 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press

l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,

*, –, +, etc.)

2 INPUT MENU

Note

;MANUAL SETUP

2 INPUT MENU

. A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

E)MULTI CH SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

COAXIAL IN

. (1);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

2 INPUT MENU

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

OPTICAL IN

. (2);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )

(3);;;;; CD

(CD)

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

2 INPUT MENU

Notes

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

HDMI IN

. [IN1];;; DVD

( DVD )

[IN2];;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

2 INPUT MENU

B)INPUT RENAME

DVD -> DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[

[ ]/[ ]:Chara.

2 INPUT MENU

MULTI CH IN

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

XM SIRIUS

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 68 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

69 En

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press

ENTER to exit from “INPUT

RENAME”.

■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each

source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,

DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, DOCK,

MULTI CH, XM, SIRIUS

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

You can only adjust the value for DOCK when your iPod is

stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Decoder select mode

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate decoder mode.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used the connected input

source.

DTS decoder prioritize setting

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.

■ Multi channel input setup

E)MULTI CH SET

Background Video

BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST

Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last

selected video source as the background video source.

Note

C)VOLUME TRIM

DVD

DVD ;;;;;0.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[

[RETURN]:Exit

2 INPUT MENU

D)DECODER MODE

. >AUTO LAST

CD ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

DTV/CBL ;;;;AUTO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

2 INPUT MENU

E)MULTI CH SET

BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

2 INPUT MENU

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 69 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

70 En

SET MENU

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Control step: 1

• Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

• Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “XM”, “SIRIUS” or “DOCK” is selected as the

input source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press

l to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press

h to raise the position of the OSD.

Source feature OSD display time

OSD-SOURCE

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

XM Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a

certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Amplifier function OSD display time

OSD-AMP

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

status after you perform a certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an

operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– sound field program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

– SCENE template parameters

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

3 OPTION MENU

;MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 1/2

. A)DISPLAY SET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)PARAM. INI

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 2/2

E)BLUETOOTH SET

. F)XM RADIO SET

G)SIRIUS SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

FL SCROLL;;;CONT

. OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

OSD-SOURCE;;;30s

OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

3 OPTION MENU

Note

B)MEMORY GUARD

>OFF ON

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

3 OPTION MENU

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 70 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

71 En

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected input

source (see page 34).

■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field

programs to the initial factory settings.

Choices: NO, YES

• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and

return to the previous menu screen.

• Select “YES” and press

ENTER to set all the sound

field parameters to the initial factory settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.

■ Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH SET

Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha

Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with

your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,

refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your

Bluetooth component” on page 59.

1 Press

ENTER to start pairing.

The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching

Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the

video monitor.

2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth adapter.

If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,

“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the

Bluetooth device list.

3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth

device list and then enter the pass key

“0000” on the Bluetooth component.

Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,

“Pairing completed” appears.

To cancel the pairing, press

RETURN to exit from

“START PAIRING”.

4 Press

RETURN to exit from “START

PAIRING”.

• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth

components, “Not found” appears.

• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No

Bluetooth Adapter” appears.

Notes

C)AUDIO SELECT

>AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

3 OPTION MENU

D)PARAM. INI

>NO YES

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

3 OPTION MENU

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

Notes

3 OPTION MENU

E)BLUETOOTH SET

START PAIRING

[ENTER]:Enter

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 71 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

72 En

SET MENU

■ XM Radio setting F)XM RADIO SET

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient

XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is

displayed here.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to

this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see

page 46).

■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio setting

G)SIRIUS SET

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the code number for locking the

desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting

the Parental Lock” on page 54 for details.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock

PARENTAL LOCK

Use this feature to set the code number for locking the

desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting

the Parental Lock” on page 54 for details.

Note

3 OPTION MENU

F)XM RADIO SET

XM ANTENNA;;;95%

[ENTER]:Return

3 OPTION MENU

G)SIRIUS SET

. PARENTAL LOCK

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Select

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 72 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

Remote control features

73 En

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 75).

■ Controlling this unit

Press

AMP to control this unit.

These buttons always control this unit.

These buttons control this unit only when

AMP is pressed.

■ Controlling a TV

Press

DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your

TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for

DTV/CBL (see page 75).

These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether

you press

DTV/CBL or not.

These buttons control your TV only when

DTV/CBL is

pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on

page 74.

You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate

remote control code for any input source selector buttons other

than

DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons

highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source

selector button.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

REC

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

STRAIGHT

INFO

DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

l PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

A XM SIRIUS

SRCH MODE

RETURN

MEMORY

AMP

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER

Turns on or off the power.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV INPUT

Changes the input source.

TV MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

REC

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

STRAIGHT

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

PROG

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

4321

ENT

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

INFO

DIRECT

PARAMETER

XM SIRIUS

SRCH MODE

RETURN

MEMORY

DTV/CBL

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 73 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

74 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components

Press one of the input selector buttons (4) or A to C

buttons to control other components. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 75). The following table shows the

function of each control button used to control other

components assigned to each input selector button. Be

advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the

selected component.

• The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 13

different components.

• When you press one of the optional component control area

buttons (A to C), you can control the desired component

without changing the input source of this unit.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 75).

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

MUTE

POWER

DVD

V-AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

AVTV

SCENE

4321

A XM SIRIUS

REC

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

STRAIGHT DIRECT

PARAMETER

MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

ENHANCER

PROG

4321

ENT

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

INFO

RETURN

MEMORY

[2]

[8]

[9]

[7]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[1]

Remote control

DVD player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD player CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner

[1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

[2] TITLE Title Band

[3] PRESET/CH k

Up VCR channel up Up

Preset up (1-8)/

Tuning up

PRESET/CH n Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)/Tuning

down

A-E/CAT. l Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

A-E/CAT. h Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

ENTER Enter Enter Hold

[4] RETURN Return Return Memory

[5] REC Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play

backward

Search backward

Search backward Search backward Search backward Information

f Search forward Search forward

Search forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause

b Skip backward Skip backward

Skip backward

Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

Audio program

down

a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

Audio program

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop

[6] 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)

[7] MENU Menu Menu Search mode

[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Enter

Notes

01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 74 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM

75 En

Remote control features

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,

try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

1 While pressing and holding one of the input

selector buttons (

) on the remote control to

select the input area you want to set up,

press

AV POWER for more than 3

seconds.

2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (

) to

enter the four-digit remote control code for

the component to be used.

When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK”

appears; however, when it does not, “RemoteSetup

NG” appears in the front panel display.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the

setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup

procedure.

Setting remote control codes

Input

source

Component

Transcripción de documentos

RX-V463_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:48 AM U Memorex Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco Philips 1043 1010, 1014 1010, 1049 1042 1004, 1051 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 Philips Magnavox 1018 Phonola 1046 Pilot 1003 Pioneer 1011, 1046 Prinz 1042 Profex 1050 Profitronic 1014 Proline 1042 Proscan 1009 Prosonic 1044 Protec 1006 Pye 1046, 1056 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001, 1047 Quasar 1004, 1035 Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Radiola 1046 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Rex 1043 RFT 1046 Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066 Saba 1043 Saisho 1044, 1050 Salora 1047 Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 Sanky 1008 Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047 Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 Scott 1012 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-Sinudyne 1046 Seleco 1043 Sentron 1050 Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050 Shivaki 1045 Shogun 1002, 1014 Siemens 1045, 1047 Signature 2000 1008 Silva 1045 Singer 1004, 1006 Sinudyne 1046 Sontec 1045 Sony 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 Sunkai 1044 Sunstar 1042 Suntronic 1042 Sunwood 1050 Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 Symphonic 1005 Taisho 1044 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003, 1042 © 2008 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 Teac 1005, 1007 Technics 1004, 1048 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Teleavia 1043 Telefunken 1043 Tenosal 1050 Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050 Tevion 1044, 1048 Thomson 1043, 1058 Thorn 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 Tokai 1045, 1050 Tonsai 1050 Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014 Towada 1050 Towika 1050 Uher 1045 Unitech 1002, 1014 Universum 1042, 1045, 1046 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videon 1044, 1048 Videosonic 1002, 1014 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 Weltblick 1045 White Westinghouse 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007 Yamishi 1050 Yokan 1050 Yoko 1045, 1050 Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037 RX-V463 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 Memphis 1050 Metz 1048 MGA 1014 MGN Technology 1002, 1014 Micromaxx 1044, 1048 Microstar 1044, 1048 Migros 1042 Minolta 1010 Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046 Montgomery Ward 1008 Motorola 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 Murphy 1042 National 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 Neckermann 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 Nesco 1050 Nikko 1003 Noblex 1002, 1014 Nokia 1043, 1047 Nordmende 1043 Oceanic 1042, 1043 Okano 1044 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003, 1008 Orion 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 Orson 1042 Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050 Otto Versand 1046 Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050 Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 RX-V463 AV Receiver All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in China WN25670 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page i Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page ii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page iii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Caution-iii En 18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by ASTANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 PREPARATION Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 46 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 47 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 47 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 49 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 50 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning .........................51 Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 51 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.. 52 Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ............ 52 Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels ............................................................... 54 Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 54 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 56 Using iPod™ ..........................................................57 Controlling iPod™................................................... 57 Connections ............................................................. 9 Recording ...............................................................60 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................61 Using SET MENU................................................... 62 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 63 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 68 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 70 Remote control features........................................73 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 73 Setting remote control codes ................................... 75 Advanced setup......................................................76 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 24 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 28 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 31 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 32 Playback ................................................................ 33 Sound field programs ........................................... 38 Sound field program descriptions............................ 38 Using audio features ............................................. 41 Enjoying high quality sound.................................... 41 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 41 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 41 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 42 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 43 (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “JSPEAKERS” or “4DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). 1 En English Automatic tuning ..................................................... 43 Manual tuning.......................................................... 43 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 44 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 44 Selecting preset stations........................................... 45 Exchanging preset station ........................................ 45 APPENDIX APPENDIX Basic operations....................................................... 33 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 34 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 34 Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor ................................................................ 35 Using your headphones............................................ 35 Muting the audio output........................................... 35 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source................................................................... 36 Displaying the input source information ................. 36 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 37 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 28 Troubleshooting.....................................................78 Glossary..................................................................88 Specifications .........................................................90 Index .......................................................................91 ADVANCED OPERATION Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room .................................... 24 Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth component ........................................................... 59 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 59 BASIC OPERATION Rear panel .................................................................. 9 Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 14 Connecting video components................................. 15 Connecting other components ................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 18 Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 19 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 19 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20 Connecting the power cable..................................... 20 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 21 Turning on and off the power .................................. 21 Front panel display .................................................. 22 Using Bluetooth™ components............................59 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................................ 6 Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button................................... 7 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 8 XM Satellite Radio tning ......................................46 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 2 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Features Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Radio tuners ◆ Minimum RMS output power ◆ FM/AM tuning capability ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately) ◆ SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using SIRIUS Connect tuner, sold separately) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) 105 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) 105 W/ch SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ SCENE template customizing capability Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multichannel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode ◆ Dolby Digital decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ DTS decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. iPod™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio DOCK terminal ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ DIRECT mode for high quality sound for all sources ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ iPod controlling capability ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 2 En ©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “Sirius Connect”, the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 3 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 1 Remote control Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Optimizer microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 3 INTRODUCTION ■ Supplied accessories 2 Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model ................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ...................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes Voltage indication • Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. 3 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 4 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Preparation: Check the items Prepare the following items. Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker Subwoofer Surround right speaker Center speaker 1. Two surround speakers 2. Center speaker DVD player ❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 7 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speaker .....................................x 2 ❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1 ❏ Surround speaker ..............................x 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: ❏ Speaker cable .........................................x 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ..........................................x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable .............................................x 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 5 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front and center speakers INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. SPEAKERS COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL CD 2 3 1 OUT HDMI DVD Loosen OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS Tighten ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y B AM DVR R SURROUND L GND C VIDEO VIDEO Insert DOCK MONITOR OUT FM 75 UNBAL. DVD DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L L CENTER R SUB WOOFER R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN OUT DVR FRONT CD AUDIO SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the center speaker To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Surround speakers Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 4 To the surround right speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 4 To the surround left speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack of this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver Subwoofer cable 5 En English SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Input jack 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 6 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components 3 SPEAKERS COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL DTV/CBL CD CD 2 3 1 OUT HDMI DVD DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y B AM DVR R SURROUND L GND C MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO AV receiver Video monitor OPTICAL OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 Connect the video cable to the video input jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. FM 75 UNBAL. DVD DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L L CENTER R SUB WOOFER R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT IN DVR FRONT CD AUDIO SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player AV receiver Digital coaxial audio output jack Video input jack Video cable 4 VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 11 • Connecting a video components ☞ P. 15 • Connecting a DVD player ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a DVD recorder ☞ P. 17 • Connecting a set-top boxes ☞ P. 17 • Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/ MD recorder ☞ P. 18 • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ☞ P. 18 • Connecting an Yamaha iPod/Bluetooth dock ☞ P. 19 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 19 Digital coaxial audio cable DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack 2 • Connecting an FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 20 • Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock ☞ P. 46 Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. DVD player Composite video output jack 6 En Video cable AV receiver DVD VIDEO jack • Connecting the SIRIUS Connect tuner ☞ P. 51 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 7 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Quick start guide Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field program according to the SCENE template that has been assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are built combinations of input sources and sound field programs. y 1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the input source selector of the video monitor to this unit. 2 Press QSCENE 1. This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. ■ The default assigned SCENE templates Default SCENE button y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 3 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 4 Rotate I VOLUME to adjust the volume. INTRODUCTION Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 21). ■ About SCENE function The name of the SCENE template and its description SCENE 1 DVD Viewing – input source: DVD – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to enjoy a DVD playback. SCENE 2 Disc Listening – input source: DVD – sound field program: 5ch Stereo For when you want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the background music for this room. SCENE 3 TV Viewing *1 – input source: DTV/CBL – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to watch a TV program. SCENE 4 Radio Listening *2, *3, *4 – input source: TUNER – sound field program: 5ch Enhancer For when you want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station. Note *1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 17 for details. *2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this unit in advance. See page 20 for details. *3 You must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See pages 43 to 45 for tuning information. *4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. y You can change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 28 for details. Note English When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated. 7 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 8 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Quick start guide ■ After using this unit... Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 28 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 31 ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 33 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 43 • Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 46 • Enjoying SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 51 This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press ASTANDBY/ ON (or HPOWER). See page 21 for details. • Using your iPod with this unit. ☞ P. 57 • Using your Bluetooth components with this unit. ☞ P. 59 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 38 • Using the direct mode for the high quality sound ☞ P. 41 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 40 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 24 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit ☞ P. 61 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 73 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 76 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit 8 En ☞ P. 37 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 9 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connections Rear panel 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL DVD CD 2 1 OUT HDMI PREPARATION COAXIAL 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y B AM DVR R SURROUND L GND C MONITOR OUT VIDEO FM 75 UNBAL. DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L L R R CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT IN DVD DTV/CBL DVR SUB WOOFER FRONT CD AUDIO SURROUND MULTI CH INPUT 9 0 CENTER SUB WOOFER A Name R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT B C (U.S.A. model) Page 1 HDMI jacks 14 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 13 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 13 4 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 46 5 SIRIUS jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 51 6 DOCK terminal 19 7 Speaker terminals 11 8 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 3 9 AUDIO jacks 13 0 VIDEO jacks 13 A MULTI CH INPUT jacks 18 B SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 11 C ANTENNA terminals 20 English 9 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 10 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. FL C FR FR SW FL 30˚ C SL SR SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SL Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 10 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 11 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Surround speakers PREPARATION Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display when you turn on this unit. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit. For details about the speaker impedance setting, see page 21. Left Right SPEAKERS COAXIAL OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL DVD CD 2 1 OUT HDMI 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y B AM DVR R SURROUND L GND C VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FM 75 UNBAL. DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L L R R CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO DVR CD SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT FRONT B terminals Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B). Center speaker Subwoofer Left Right Front speakers (FRONT A) English 11 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 12 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) ■ Connecting to the SPEAKER terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug 12 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 13 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with. Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs Coaxial digital audio cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO (Yellow) (Red) (Blue) (Green) O V PR PB Y Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO L Video jacks and cable plugs Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Notes COMPONENT VIDEO • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. Optical input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Input PR PB Y Output (MONITOR OUT) PR PB Y VIDEO Note The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks. English 13 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 14 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 6ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 36). ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Output Input HDMI HDMI AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO Digital output Analog output Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/ CBL jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” (see page 67). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the AUDIO output jacks. 14 En VIDEO Through Output 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 15 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting video components Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 67). COAXIAL OPTICAL DVD VD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL DVD CD 2 1 OUT HDMI PREPARATION • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y B DVR C VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L CENTER R D/ OUT -R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL OUT AUDIO SURROUND SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT PR HDMI in WO FRONT CD DVR PB OUTPUT Y Component video in V Video in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections English 15 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 16 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting other components Notes Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. • Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 15). • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL IN” in “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” (see page 68). ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player HDMI out Component video out Coaxial out Audio out Video out R V L PR C COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL DVD CD 2 1 OUT HDMI Y OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 PB 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y XM PR PB A SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y B DVR C VIDEO VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L L R R CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO OUT DVR CD WO FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections (One for the video connection, and one for the audio connection) 16 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 17 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL CD 2 1 OUT HDMI 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO DVD PR PB Y XM PR SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y PB A B DVR C MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO DVD IN DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT DVR OUT L L R R CENTER DVD DTV/CBL OUT WO FRONT CD DVR AUDIO SURROUND SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT V L R R PR PB Y Video in Audio in Audio out V PREPARATION IN IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) L Component video out Video out DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting a set-top box Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder HDMI out Component video out Optical out Audio out Video out L V R O PR COAXIAL DTV/CBL DVD CD 2 1 OUT HDMI Y OPTICAL DVD DTV/CBL IN2 DVD IN1 PB 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y XM PB PR SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y B A DVR C VIDEO VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT indicates recommended connections MONITOR OUT L L R R CENTER IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO OUT DVR CD WO FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT indicates alternative connections (One for the video connection, and one for the audio connection) 17 En English IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 18 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting audio components Connect the audio components as follows. ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes • When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the corresponding setting in “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” (see page 68). indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections COAXIAL OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DVD CD DTV/CBL 3 2 1 OUT HDMI DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PR A L O MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO R Optical out Audio in DVD L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L L L R R CD recorder or MD recorder Audio out R R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL Audio out OUT CD DVR FRONT AUDIO SURROUND W CD player MULTI CH INPU ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 34), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. CENTER L R SUB FRONT SURROUND WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT L R Multi-format player/ External decoder 18 En Center out Front out Subwoofer out R Surround out L 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 19 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or Bluetooth™ adapter Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. • When audio signals are input at the AUDIO jacks, PORTABLE jack and the DOCK terminal on the rear panel, the priority order of the input signal is as follows: 1. DOCK 2. PORTABLE 3. AUDIO PREPARATION Notes This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. VOLUME STANDBY/ ON OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY INFO TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE XM PB SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y DOCK 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT ANTENNA l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM h l TONE CONTROL INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE B EFFECT SILENT CINEMA DVR C AM GND VIDEO AUX Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter VIDEO L V L Video output AUDIO R PORTABLE 3.5 mm stereo mini plug R Audio output Game console or video camera Audio output Portable audio player English 19 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 20 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna Connecting the FM and AM antennas Open the lever Insert Close the lever Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. y See right for connection information of the supplied AM loop antenna. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) Note The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different depending on the models. S DOCK ANTENNA L Connecting the power cable AM R GND Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. FM 75 UNBAL. (U.S.A. model) SUB WOOFER CENTER TPUT (U.S.A. model) Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Power cable 20 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 21 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Setting the speaker impedance Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 1 Press and hold K TONE CONTROL and then press A STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down ■ Turning on this unit Press A STANDBY/ON (or H POWER) to turn on this unit. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Set this unit to the standby mode Press A STANDBY/ON (or I STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. PREPARATION 2 Press A STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. Refer to the right column for details. Turning on and off the power STANDBY /ON 3 Press L PROGRAM l / h to select “SP IMP.”. “SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting (“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display. 4 Press M STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. 5 Press A STANDBY/ON to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 21 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 22 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections Front panel display Note The XM and SIRIUS indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator or SIRIUS indicator lights up only when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source. 1 2 MULTI CH DVR 3 V-AUX DOCK q DIGITAL q PL SP AB 4 DTV/CBL DVD 5 MD/CD-R ENHANCER 6 CD 7 TUNER XM SILENT CINEMA ft neural ms dB PCM 8 9 0 A B 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 14). 2 DOCK indicator • Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 19) and V-AUX is selected as the input source. • Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is in the paring (see page 59) or the Bluetooth adaptor is searching the Bluetooth component (see page 59). • Lights up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor is connected to the Bluetooth component (see page 19). 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 38). 4 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 5 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 24). 22 En SIRIUS VOL. YPAO MEMORY VIRTUAL AUTO TUNED STEREO MUTE HOLD SLEEP C D dB LFE L C R SL SR E 6 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite Radio or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode (see pages 43 to 56). 7 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator • The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 35). • Indicates the current volume level. 8 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 9 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. 0 Headphone indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 35). A SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers activated (see page 33). SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated. SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 23 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Connections B CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 39). ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 39). SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 39). 30º 30º PREPARATION Approximately 6 m (20 ft) C Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. D SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 37). E Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SR LFE indicator Input channel indicators Input channel indicators • Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. • Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup procedure (see page 24) or the speaker level setting procedure in the “SP LEVEL” (see page 65). 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 75. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places English 23 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 24 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. OPTIMIZER MIC INFO TUNING AUTO/MAN'L VIDEO AUX AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE y You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Optimizer microphone Make sure of the following check points. The following display appears in the OSD. Note AUTO SETUP Before starting the automatic setup, check the following check points. ❏ SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START Automatic Processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select 3 p ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. Headphones are disconnected from this unit. This unit and the video monitor are turned on. This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. p ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER HIGH CUT MIN MAX Controls of a subwoofer (example) ❏ ❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front speaker system (see page 33). The room is sufficiently quiet. y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 24 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 25 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO” and the pointer is pointing at “START”. y You can also select the following setup methods. In this case, press 8 k to select “SETUP”, press 8 l / h to select the one of the following choices and then select “START”. Note “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. 5 Press 8 n to select “START” and then press 8 ENTER to start the setup procedure. The following message appears in the OSD. NOTICE Loudtesttonesare output. Pleasekeepquiet orleavetheroom. Press 8 ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the result display appears in the OSD. Notes • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. This unit performs the following checks: PREPARATION Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. 6 Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Press[ENTER] Before proceeding next operation Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure. For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and move to the wall where speakers are not around. We recommend that you leave the listening room during the automatic setup procedure. English 25 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 26 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room The display changes as follows. 7 Press 8 k and 8 ENTER to display the setup results in detail. 8 Press 8 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. AUTO SETUP SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START p p Automatic Processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start Results of the speaker connection and wiring AUTO SETUP Results of the speaker distance from the listening position INITIALIZING . WIRING/LEVEL DISTANCE SIZE [ WAITING;;; ;;;;;;;;;; []:Exit Results of the speaker size AUTO SETUP RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB . >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the speaker output level y If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 61). The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “E-9:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 27. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears (see page 27). 26 En Note The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your speakers. 9 Press 8 ENTER to return to the result display. AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB CANCEL >SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Detail 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 27 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 10 11 Press 8 n and then press 8 l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. Press 8 ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the result display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PREPARATION SET MENU Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press 8 ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. 12 Press M MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 13 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. AUTO SETUP . WARNING(2) RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB CANCEL >SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Detail 2 Press 8 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. y WARNING If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. W-1:OUT OF PHASE Reverse channel AAAAFLAAAAA--AAACENTER AAAASLAAAAA--- ■ If an error screen appears [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Press 8 k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press 8 ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-8:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 84. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. ERROR . E-8:USER CANCEL Can't detect signal at MIC >RETRY 3 Press 8 ENTER to return to the result display. EXIT [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. English 27 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 28 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press O INPUT l / h (or press 5 AMP and then press 8 l / h) to select the desired template. SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening l INPUT h Front panel If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. or AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template Remote control 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Press and hold the desired Q SCENE (or 6 SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 1 3 seconds 1 or Front panel Remote control 1 Flashes DVD Viewing 28 En DVD MovieView 3 Press the Q SCENE (or 6 SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 Front panel or 1 Remote control Note Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 32 for details. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 29 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates Default SCENE buttons DVD Viewing 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc Hi-fi Listening Music Disc Listening Disc Listening CD 2 CD Hi-fi Listening BASIC OPERATION CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs iPod or Bluetooth component TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) Radio Listening XM XM Listening SIRIUS SIRIUS Listening DOCK Dock Listening DTV/CBL TV Viewing 4 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX* Game Playing Note * When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal. y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 31 for details. English 29 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 30 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting. SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features DVD Viewing DVD STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing DVD MOVIE Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD MUSIC Pop/Rock Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live video on your DVD player. DVR Viewing DVR MOVIE Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Disc Hi-fi Listening DVD DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. Music Disc Listening DVD STEREO 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD STEREO 5ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. CD Hi-fi Listening CD DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. CD Listening CD STEREO 5ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player as the background music. CD Music Listening CD STEREO 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music source on your CD player. Radio Listening TUNER Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on the DVD player. 1 2 MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. 5ch Enhancer 4 1 XM Listening XM SIRIUS Listening SIRIUS MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you enjoy SIRIUS Satellite Radio programs. 5ch Enhancer Dock Listening DOCK MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or 5ch Enhancer MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs. 5ch Enhancer Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth adapter. TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on your TV. Game Playing V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT Game Select this SCENE template when you play video games. Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general programs on your TV. 3 1 30 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 31 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • INPUT: • MODE: Create the original SCENE template SCENE : DVD Viewing SCENE : DVD Viewing INPUT : DVD SCENE template library (Image) 4 Press the 6 SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 BASIC OPERATION The input source component The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or DIRECT mode (see pages 39 and 41) • NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see page 42) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select a SCENE template Press 5 AMP and then 8 k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then 8 l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 1 Assign to the SCENE button y 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press and hold the desired 6 SCENE button for 3 seconds. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. 1 3 seconds An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding 6 SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 32 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each 6 SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned 6 SCENE button. ■ Renaming the SCENE templates Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the 6 SCENE buttons, press 5 AMP and then press 8 l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. 31 En English Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3 of “Customizing the preset SCENE templates” and then press 8 ENTER. • Press 8 k / n to select the desired character. • Press 8 l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press 9 RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press 8 ENTER to confirm the new name. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 32 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Selecting the SCENE templates Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 75). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired 6 SCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. y POWER * POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH TV VOL SCENE 3 4 SCENE buttons SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY REC INFO l PROG h ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Note * Press and hold the 6 SCENE button and the desired input selector button (4) for 3 seconds. These buttons control the input source component. See page 74 for details of the function of each button. 32 En Press the 6 SCENE button again to operate the input source component. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 33 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations 1 3 Rotate I VOLUME (or press N VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 6 Press L PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press 5 AMP and then B PROG l / h repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 38 for details about sound field programs. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press J SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up in the front panel display. Press O INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (4)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input sources MULTI CH DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER XM SIRIUS INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source Movie Dramatic Currently selected surround field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 34). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 36 for details. ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 43 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. • See page 46 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. • See page 51 for details about SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning instructions. BASIC OPERATION 2 5 See page Enjoy high quality sound 41 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 41 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 40 Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 42 Use headphones 35 Select a decoder to play back sources with 39 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 37 English 33 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 34 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the same input source. y • We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 71). Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 18) as the input source. Press O INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 5 AMP and then E MULTI CH IN) to select MULTI CH. “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. y Press PAUDIO SELECT (or press 5 AMP and then FAUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. Available input sources MULTI CH DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER XM SIRIUS A.SEL:AUTO Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUDIO SELECT Function AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Selects only digital signals. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN DVD and HDMI IN DTV/CBL jacks are not used. Use “INPUT ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 68). 34 En Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 69). Note The input signals are amplified and output directly without sound processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field programs, the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is selected as the input source. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 35 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Playback Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press O DISPLAY. The current status screen appears in the OSD. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. y You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). y Note Notes The OSD signal is not output at the DVR VIDEO OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically activated (see page 39). BASIC OPERATION STATUSVOL:-40dB DVDMovieViewing MOVIE MovieSpacious INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:CINEMA(MID) [DISPLAY]:STATUSOFF Muting the audio output Press J MUTE to mute the audio output. Press J MUTE again to resume the audio output. y • You can also rotate I VOLUME or press N VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 66). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. English 35 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 36 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Playback Playing video sources in the background of an audio source You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons (4) control to select a video source and then an audio source. XM SIRIUS CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Audio sources Video sources ■ Audio information Information Descriptions FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. V-AUX Note y • You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see page 34). Press 5 AMP and then press E MULTI CH IN. • Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 69). “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. ■ Video information Information Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Press 5 AMP and then M MENU. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. Descriptions HDMI SIGNAL Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See “HDMI error and message” for details. (Only when error is detected) SET MENU TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. HDMI error and message Message 2 Press 8 n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press 8 ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. 3 Press 8 l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. 4 Press M MENU again to exit from “SET MENU”. 36 En Cause DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. OUT OF RES. The connected monitor is not compatible with the resolution of the input video signal. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 37 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Playback Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. Press 5 AMP and then press T SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press T SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. BASIC OPERATION y • To cancel the sleep timer, press 5 AMP and then press T SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing A STANDBY/ON (or I STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. English 37 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 38 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press L PROGRAM l / h (or press 5 AMP and then press B PROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 34). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39). y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. Sound field program descriptions Category MUSIC Program Features Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. 2ch Enhancer 5ch Enhancer Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENHANCER Note The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each direction. 38 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 39 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Sound field programs ■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. Press 5 AMP and then press QSUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. Decoder Functions Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources Neural Sur. Neural Surround processing for any sources Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 64), Virtual CINEMA DSP is automatically activated whenever you select a CINEMA DSP program (see page 38). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 64) in the following cases: – when “5ch Stereo” (see page 38) is selected. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA is automatically activated whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (except for 5ch Stereo) (see page 38). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION Pro Logic ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Press M STRAIGHT (or press 5 AMP and then press C STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press M STRAIGHT (or press 5 AMP and then C STRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. English 39 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 40 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Sound field programs ■ Editing sound fields parameters y You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: 1 While listening to a source, press 5 AMP and then press S PARAMETER. 2 Press 8 k / n to select the desired parameter you want to change. 3 Press 8 l / h to change the parameter value. Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX For 2ch Enhancer and 5ch Enhancer: Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 70). Effect level EFFECT LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: LOW, HIGH For Pro Logic II Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. 40 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 41 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM USING AUDIO FEATURES Using audio features Enjoying high quality sound Use the DIRECT mode to enjoy the high quality sounds of the selected source. When the DIRECT mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note Press NDIRECT (or press 5 AMP and then D DIRECT) to select “DIRECT”. This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 24) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 65). Notes 1 • “TONE CONTROL” and “SOUND MENU” (see page 63) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. Press 5 AMP and then press 7 LEVEL on the remote control and then 8 k / n to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display While DIRECT mode is activated, the front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. y Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. 1 2 Press K TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Press L PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker y • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • When the video monitor is turned on, the “SPEAKER LEVEL” adjustment menu appears in the video monitor. 2 Press 8 l / h to adjust the speaker output level. • Press 8 h to increase the value. • Press 8 l to decrease the value. • Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB 3 Press 7 LEVEL to turn off the speaker level adjustment display. Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when this unit is in the DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source. Adjusted speaker BASIC OPERATION y English 41 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 42 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Using audio features Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press 5 AMP and then R NIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press 8 l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the DIRECT mode (see page 41) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 34). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 42 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 43 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. 1 Note Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press CBAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press HTUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up 1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press CBAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press HTUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO BASIC OPERATION 2 Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. AFM 88.9 MHz No colon (:) AFM 88.9 MHz If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press B PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press B PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. TUNED AFM 88.9 MHz English 43 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 44 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press CBAND to select “FM” as the reception band. Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 43 for tuning instructions. 2 Press FMEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. 3 Press DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold FMEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes Flashes MEMORY A3:FM 88.9 MHz MEMORY AUTO Preset station group and number A1:FM 88.9 MHz Colon (:) Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y 4 Press FMEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing DA/B/C/D/E and then EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. TUNED A1:FM 88.9 MHz Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. 44 En The displayed station has been stored as A1. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 45 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press 4TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 Press DA/B/C/D/E (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Exchanging preset station You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold BPRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes BASIC OPERATION Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY E1:FM 88.9 MHz Flashes 3 E1:FM 88.9 MHz y You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Select preset station “A5” using DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY A5:FM 88.9 MHz Flashes 4 Press BPRESET/TUNING again. “EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. English 45 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 46 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio tuning XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio, stand-up comedy, children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio quality from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM Satellite Radio online information For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/ For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/ Note The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. XM READY legal disclaimer XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XM-RADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial- free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.com (US residents) and www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-Tuner Dock. y To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “XM RADIO SET” screen in the video monitor (see page 72) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. Note XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) XM PB SIRIUS DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y B AM DVR GND C FM 75 UNBAL. ER SUB WOOFER CENTER B ER OUTPUT 46 En If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not correct (see page 82). 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 47 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM XM Satellite Radio tuning Activating XM Satellite Radio Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM Satellite Radio operations 1 Press O INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3 XM) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Lights up Note MULTI CH The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER XM SIRIUS 001Preview Notes • The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 78 for appropriate remedies. 2 BASIC OPERATION y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 48. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 48. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 48. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 48. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 39). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 49). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 50). English 47 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 48 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM XM Satellite Radio tuning y Before performing operations, press 3XM to select “XM” as the input source. 3 ■ All Channel Search mode 1 2 Press BSEARCH MODE (or MSRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. y y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press MSRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the numeric buttons (G) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n). • To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. ■ Category Search mode 1 Press BSEARCH MODE (or MSRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press DCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. 3 Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 1 2 3 The display changes as follows. <XM> --1 Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. <XM> -12 y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n). ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 49. y All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial factory setting. 1 Press BSEARCH MODE (or MSRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press DCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). 48 En <XM>123 y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (G) and then press TENT to confirm the input number. Instead of pressing TENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (G) or TENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 49 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM XM Satellite Radio tuning Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels 3 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 48. Press DCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 47 for details. C- 043XMU Selected preset channel group 4 Currently selected channel number Flashes 2 Press FMEMORY (or 9MEMORY). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. MEMORY C5 043XMU Selected preset channel number MEMORY Flashes Note You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 043XMU Press EPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. 5 Press FMEMORY (or 9MEMORY) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. C5:043XMU Colon (:) Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. English 49 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 50 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM XM Satellite Radio tuning Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 82 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press H INFO (or A INFO) repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • To hold the current XM Raido information, press 8 ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed. Press 8 ENTER again to release the held information. • When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cannot receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press ODISPLAY. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. XM INFORMATION Channel number/name [1] [2] Channel category [3] Artist name/song title ALL CH SEARCH XM : 043 CHAN : XMU CAT : Rock NAME : Coldplay TITLE : Speed of sound .(Spe / Coldplay) [ ]/[ ]: CHANNEL [[]/[[]: CATEGORY [4] [5] [1] Search mode (see page 48) [2] Channel category When the channel number / name is displayed: [3] Song title [4] Channel number/name [043] XMU [5] Artist name y When the channel category is displayed: <CAT>ROCK When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Clo 50 En • To turn off the OSD, press ODISPLAY again. • XM status messages also appear in the OSD. • You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information, press 8 ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are holding the XM information. Press 8 ENTER again or change the XM Satellite Radio channel to release the held information. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 51 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ TUNING SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today's hits to R&B, oldies and classical masterpieces. From authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100% commercial-free. SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games are broadcast during their respective seasons.) Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don’t forget a host of other great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more information, visit http://www.sirius.com/. SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer SIRIUS is available in the U.S. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S. and is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To get SIRIUS Satellite Radio, a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required (sold separately). Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information. “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see page 56) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. • You will need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. BASIC OPERATION Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Notes T AN DC XM PB SIRIUS DTV/CBL Y B 5V DOCK ANTENNA To the AC wall outlet • If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (see page 83). • If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. English 51 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 52 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Before using the SIRIUS Satellite feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription, you need the Sirius ID, which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channel “0” (see below). Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations 1 Press O INPUT l / h (or press K SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. ■ Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner Lights up MULTI CH 1 Press K SIRIUS. 2 Press F 0 and then T ENT to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears in the front panel display. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER XM SIRIUS 184 SIRIUS Wea y When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes • The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select “184” or “000”. y To scroll the message again, press H INFO (or A INFO). Write the Sirius ID below. ID: SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 2 Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 53. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 53. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 53. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 53. y • You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 54). • You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 56). 52 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 53 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Before performing the following operations, press K SIRIUS. ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press B SEARCH MODE (or M SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. 2 Press E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. y ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see “Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” on page 54. 1 Press B SEARCH MODE (or M SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press D CATEGORY (or 8 A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). 3 Press E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). y ■ Category Search mode You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (G). 1 Press B SEARCH MODE (or M SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press D CATEGORY (or 8 A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. 3 Press E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press M SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the numeric buttons (G) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons (G) as shown below. y 1 2 BASIC OPERATION • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing D CATEGORY (or 8 A-E/CAT. l / h). 3 You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n). Note This unit skips the channels when this unit is All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is locked (see page 54). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. y • To display the SIRIUS Radio ID (SID) number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (G) on the remote control and then press T ENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing T ENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (G) or T ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:____” appears in the front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the numeric buttons (G) or press T ENT to cancel. English 53 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 54 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning Before performing the following operations, press K SIRIUS. 4 Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels Press E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 53. 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” on page 52 for details. Flashes MEMORY A1023 Hair Na Currently selected preset channel number 5 Press F MEMORY (or 9 MEMORY) to set the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. 001 SIRIUS Hit Currently selected channel number A1:023 Hair Na 2 Press F MEMORY (or 9 MEMORY). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. MEMORY Setting the Parental Lock Flashes Note You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 3 Colon (:) Press D CATEGORY (or 8 A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. Flashes You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing E PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8 PRESET/CH k / n). ■ Setting the code number and the locked channels Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 1 Press 5 AMP on the remote control and then press M MENU to display. 2 Press 8 n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and then press 8 ENTER. MEMORY A-023 Hair N Currently selected preset channel group 54 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 55 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning 3 4 Note Press 8 n repeatedly to select “OPTION MENU” and then press 8 ENTER. Press 8 k / n repeatedly to select “G)SIRIUS SET” and then press 8 ENTER. The following menu screen appears. In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the channel is locked. Only the first eight characters of each channel name are displayed in the list. 10 3 OPTION MENU G)SIRIUS SET Press 8 ENTER to lock the selected channel. Check mark appears before the selected channel. y . PARENTAL LOCK When you select the locked channel and press 8 ENTER, this unit unlocks the selected channel. 5 p [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Press 8 ENTER. “NEW PIN:0000” appears. Repeat steps 9 and 10 to lock the channels you want. 12 Press 9 RETURN repeatedly to exit from the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. 13 Press M MENU to exit from the setup menu. This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather & Emergency” or “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner). PARENTAL LOCK NEWPIN:0000 [0] [9]:NUMBER [ENT]:ENTER Note If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit, “Not Available” appears. y If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___” appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to step 8 and then proceed the operations. 6 Enter the desired 4-digit code number by using the numeric buttons (G). y Press 9 RETURN to return the previous menu level without setting the code number. 7 8 9 y If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number, use “SSR PIN” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to reset the Parental Lock code number. ■ Tuning into the locked channels You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct number access mode or preset channel mode. When you tune into the locked channel, following message appears in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons (G) or press T ENT to cancel the tuning. Press 8 ENTER to confirm the code number. “OK” appears and then “PIN:___” appears. Enter the 4-digit code number you set at step 6 above to unlock the protection. When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears. BASIC OPERATION 11 PIN:____ Note If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously selected channel. English Press 8 l / h repeatedly to select the desired channel category and then press 8 k / n repeatedly to select the channel you want to lock. 55 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 56 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning y Before performing the following operations, press K SIRIUS. Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, composer name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press 8 ENTER while it is being displayed. Note ■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the OSD If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 83 for appropriate remedies. Press H INFO (or O DISPLAY). The following screen is displayed in the OSD. ■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press H INFO (or A INFO) repeatedly to toggle between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. CHANNEL INFO e.g.) 008 Big '80s [1] [2] SIRIUSInformationANT: [5] ALLCHSEARCH 008:Big'80s :Pop :Sanumemo [6] [3] :RoadtoIndia [4] C:FrankieZipper [7] Channel number/name [1] Search mode (see page 52) CATEGORY INFO [2] Channel category e.g.) Pop [3] Song title Channel category [4] Composer name SONG INFO [5] Antenna reception level e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa [6] Channel number/name Artist name / Song title [7] Artist name COMPOSER INFO y e.g.) Frankie Zipper Composer name ANTENNA INFO e.g.) 043 ANTENNA Channel number/Antenna reception level DSP PROG. INFO e.g.) 5ch Enhancer Sound field program Back to “CHANNEL INFO” 56 En - • To turn off the OSD, press O DISPLAY again. • SIRIUS status messages also appear in the OSD. • You can select the amount of time the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-SOURCE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • To hold the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press 8 ENTER while it is being displayed in the OSD. While this unit is holding the information screen, “HOLD” appears in the OSD. • The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are holding the SIRIUS information. Press 8 ENTER again or change the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel to release the held information. When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 57 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 19), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 19). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y Controlling iPod™ BASIC OPERATION • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 85. • Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Remote control operation Before performing the following operations, press 4 V-AUX/DOCK. Button 8 ENTER Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu 0 ll ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod (some models only). • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Search backward (Press and hold) hh Search forward (Press and hold) b Skip backward a Skip forward e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) p Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) M MENU Previous menu O DISPLAY Display English 57 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 58 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Using iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control when you connect this unit and a monitor using the VIDEO connection. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. y • The name of the song being played also appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70) Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press 8 ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. 1 Press 4 V-AUX/DOCK and then ODISPLAY. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. y When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. y When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 ■ The function of the play information display [1] > > > > > > > [4] [5] [6] 2 Press 8 k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press 8 ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia ||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 All [2] [3] Top [1] Playback status [2] Track number/total tracks [3] Artist name [4] Song title [5] Progress bar [6] Elapsed time [7] Shuffle and repeat icons [8] (playback), forward) and [9] Name of the album [10] Remaining time 58 En All (pausing), (search (search backward) [7] [8] [9] [10] 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 59 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your Bluetooth component in advance. Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth component Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Note If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front panel display. Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. When the pairing procedure is successful, “Completed” appears in the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing. ■ Pairing by using “SET MENU” Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor. Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See page 71 for details. ■ Quick pairing To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 4 V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with. 3 Press and hold CBAND (or 7 BAND) for 3 seconds to start pairing. Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing, “Searching...” appears for a moment. While the Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 4 Note The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component 1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 4 V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component. When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display. y • When you press 8 ENTER, the connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth component, press 9 RETURN. English y To cancel the pairing, press CBAND (or 7 BAND) again. 59 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 60 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 41) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 41) and the sound field programs (see page 38) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press O INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (4)) to select the source component you want to record from. 60 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 61 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 24). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Parameter Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 63 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 65 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 65 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 66 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 66 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 66 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 66 H)HDMI SET Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 67 ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Parameter Features Page A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 68 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 68 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 69 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 69 E)MULTI CH SET Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 69 English 61 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 62 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the XM and iPod information is displayed. 70 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 70 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 71 D)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 71 E)BLUETOOTH SET Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a Bluetooth component (see page 59). 71 F)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. 72 G)SIRIUS SET Sets the SIRIUS Parental Lock code number and the channel lock configuration (see page 54). 72 Note The “XM RADIO SET” and “SIRIUS SET” parameters are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 36). Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y ;MANUAL SETUP You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. 1 . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU Press 5 AMP and then press M MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 4 Press 8 k / n / l / h and 8 ENTER to select and change the parameter. • Press 8 k / n to select the desired menu or parameter. • Press 8 l / h to change the parameter value. • Press 8 ENTER to enter the selected menu or to confirm the parameter. • Press 9 RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 5 Press M MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. TOPAMENU . ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press 8 k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. SET MENU TOPAMENU ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO 62 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU 2 Press 8 ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 63 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. ;MANUAL SETUP Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE ;MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET FRONT SP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SP LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET SMALL >LARGE Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET FRONT B;;;;FRONT • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 64), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG 1 SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). A)SPEAKER SET CENTER SP NONE >SML LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. English 63 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 64 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUR. L/R SP NONE >SML Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 63). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or front speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 63). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz LRG 1 SOUND MENU When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39). LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH A)SPEAKER SET CROSSOVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUBWOOFER PHASE 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET LFE/BASS OUT SWFR FRNT>BOTH When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 63). When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 63). 64 En >NORMAL REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 65 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 SOUND MENU 1 SOUND MENU B)SP LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ . FR.L FR.R CNTR SWFR B)SP LEVEL 2/2 -__________+ .SUR.L SUR.R ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. 1 SOUND MENU C)SP DISTANCE Front left speaker FR.R Front right speaker CNTR Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) SP DISTANCE ADVANCED OPERATION Note [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p FR.L 2/2 . SUR. L;;;;;8.0ft SUR. R;;;;;8.0ft p p Adjusted speaker C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONT L;;;10.0ft FRONT R;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;;8.5ft SWFR;;;;;;10.0ft [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p SP LEVEL 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. English 65 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 66 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU ■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 SOUND MENU F)DYNAMIC RANGE 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p p Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL E)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 64), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. 1 SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;;;+16dB INIT.VOL.;;;;OFF [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p 1 SOUND MENU Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker compression. p Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input signal contains the LFE channel. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. 66 En Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. . SPEAKER;;;;;;MAX HEADPHONE;;;;MAX 1 SOUND MENU D)CENTER GEQ TEST >OFF ON . 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Mute type MUTE TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 35). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 67 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is +16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB. ■ HDMI set H)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 1 SOUND MENU H)HDMI SET Control range: +16 dB, +10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V463 [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INIT.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Initial volume INIT.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, MUTE, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Support audio S.AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choice RX-V463 Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Other Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.” setting. Functions • This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other”. • Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes English 67 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 68 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the decoder mode or rename the input source. For HDMI jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN [1] HDMI IN [2] Choices: (1) DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (2) DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR ;MANUAL SETUP 2 INPUT MENU 2 INPUT MENU A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT HDMI IN . [IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) p p . A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [p]/[[]:Select ■ Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using OINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (4)). Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 2 INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME DVD Press one of the input selector buttons (4) or E MULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. XM SIRIUS CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT COAXIAL IN DVD DVD p 1 2 INPUT MENU . (1);;;;; ( -> DVD [p]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. p For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1 COAXIAL IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME ) or MULTI CH IN [p]/[[]:Select V-AUX/DOCK For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) [p]/[[]:Select Note You cannot select a specific item more than once. 68 En 2 Press 5 AMP and then press 8 l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press 8 k / n to select the character you want to use and then press 8 l / h to move to the next space. Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press 8 n to change the character in the following order, or press 8 k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 69 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press 8 ENTER to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, DOCK, MULTI CH, XM, SIRIUS Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB 2 INPUT MENU DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET 2 INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST [p]/[[]:Select Background Video BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST C)VOLUME TRIM DVD DVD ;;;;;0.0dB y Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. [p]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit ADVANCED OPERATION Note You can only adjust the value for DOCK when your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE 2 INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE . >AUTO CD DVD DTV/CBL LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. English 69 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 70 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. ;MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI 3 OPTION MENU 2/2 E)BLUETOOTH SET . F)XM RADIO SET G)SIRIUS SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ;MANUAL SETUP 1/2 ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET 3 OPTION MENU A)DISPLAY SET p p DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 FL SCROLL;;;CONT . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press 8 l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press 8 h to make the front panel display brighter. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM”, “SIRIUS” or “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press 8 l to lower the position of the OSD. • Press 8 h to raise the position of the OSD. 70 En Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information, SIRIUS Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON 3 OPTION MENU B)MEMORY >OFF GUARD ON [p]/[[]:Select • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 71 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST ■ Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH SET 3 OPTION MENU E)BLUETOOTH SET START PAIRING 3 OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST [p]/[[]:Select • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 34). ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI [ENTER]:Enter Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth component” on page 59. To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. Press 8 ENTER to start pairing. The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the video monitor. 3 OPTION MENU 2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. Once this unit completes the pairing successfully, “Pairing completed” appears. D)PARAM. INI >NO YES [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu screen. • Select “YES” and press 8 ENTER to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES y To cancel the pairing, press 9 RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. 4 Press 9 RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. Notes • If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. • If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No Bluetooth Adapter” appears. English 71 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 72 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM SET MENU ■ XM Radio setting F)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 3 OPTION MENU F)XM RADIO SET XM ANTENNA;;;95% [ENTER]:Return XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Note “NONE” is displayed if XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 46). ■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio setting G)SIRIUS SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the code number for locking the desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting the Parental Lock” on page 54 for details. 3 OPTION MENU G)SIRIUS SET . PARENTAL LOCK p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock PARENTAL LOCK Use this feature to set the code number for locking the desired SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Refer to “Setting the Parental Lock” on page 54 for details. 72 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 73 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 75). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press 5 AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER Press 4 DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL (see page 75). POWER DTV/CBL DVD B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE *1 DTV/CBL TV VOL AMP SCENE 1 2 STANDBY POWER AV A XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER TV CH DVR V-AUX/DOCK 3 DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH *1 TV VOL 4 SRCH MODE MENU VOLUME BAND LEVEL TITLE POWER TV SCENE 3 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY *2 REC DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY REC INFO l PROG h 3 4 NIGHT PARAMETER 6 7 8 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 0 10 ADVANCED OPERATION 2 DIRECT 5 9 *2 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 STRAIGHT INFO l SLEEP ENT PROG h ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit. *2 These buttons control this unit only when 5 AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press 4 DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. These buttons control your TV only when 4 DTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 74. y 73 En English You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate remote control code for any input source selector buttons other than 4 DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source selector button. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 74 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (4) or A to C buttons to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 75). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. [1] [2] POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE y TV CH [3] [4] [5] RETURN MEMORY TV VOL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INFO [6] PROG h 2 3 4 DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 9 0 LD player CD player MD/CD recorder [1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 [2] TITLE Title [3] PRESET/CH k ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 STRAIGHT 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL Digital TV/ Cable TV Power *1 [8] DISPLAY REC DVD player/ VCR recorder Remote control [7] ENTER l • The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 13 different components. • When you press one of the optional component control area buttons (A to C), you can control the desired component without changing the input source of this unit. SRCH MODE MENU VOLUME BAND LEVEL TITLE 10 8 SLEEP ENT [9] Tuner Band Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8)/ Tuning up PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8)/Tuning down A-E/CAT. l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A-E/CAT. h Right Right Preset up (A-E) Enter Enter Hold [4] RETURN ENTER Return Return Memory [5] REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Information *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Audio program down a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Audio program up s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Play Stop Disc skip Rec Play Play Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) [7] MENU Menu Search mode [8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display [9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Enter Menu Notes *1 *2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 75). 74 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 75 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (4) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press 2 AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. A XM SIRIUS CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer Default code CD YAMAHA 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000 DTV/CBL — — — V-AUX TUNER YAMAHA 5011 DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011 XM TUNER YAMAHA 5009 SIRIUS TUNER YAMAHA 5017 A TUNER YAMAHA 5012 B TUNER YAMAHA 5009 C TUNER YAMAHA 5017 AV Press for 3 seconds While holding down 2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (G) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK” appears; however, when it does not, “RemoteSetup NG” appears in the front panel display. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. Note ADVANCED OPERATION CD POWER You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. English 75 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 76 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only ASTANDBY/ON, L PROGRAM l / h, and M STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω. • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω. SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level Front (A or B) 8Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 1 Press A STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold K TONE CONTROL and then press A STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press L PROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. 4 Press M STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press A STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 76 En 6Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround ■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock code number reset SSR PIN Use this feature to set the code number for the SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock feature to the initial factory setting. Choices: RESET, CANCEL • Select “RESET” to set the code number to the initial factory setting. • Select “CANCEL” to set the code number to the initial factory setting. Note Even if you set “SSR PIN” to “RESET”, this unit does not unlock the locked channels. The initial factory setting of the Parental Lock code number is “0000”. 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 77 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Advanced setup ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Initializing INIT. Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 87). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION English 77 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 78 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. 78 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 21 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13-18 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. 34 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 34 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 34 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with O INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons(4)). 33 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with JSPEAKERS. 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press JMUTE or N VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 35 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 14 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V463” in “MANUAL SETUP”. 67 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 79 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy See page 21 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press JMUTE or N VOLUME +/– to resume audio output. 35 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11-18 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 41 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. This is not malfunction. — No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 63 Some sound field programs do not output sounds from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 38 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 64 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press CSTRAIGHT so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 39 No sound from the center, surround speakers when the FRONT B speakers are activated. “FRONT B” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “ZONE B”. Set “FRONT B” to “FRONT”. 63 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 64 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 64 The source does not contain low-frequency bass signals. This is not malfunction. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that the impedance setting is correct. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. English 79 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 80 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 34 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 67 The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. This is not malfunction. — A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 70 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the connected HDMI component. The HDMI component does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 11 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This in not malfunction. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 80 En 14, 18 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 81 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 20 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 43 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 43 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. 44 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 43 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noise can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 81 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 82 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ XM Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Dock cable is connected to this unit. 46 CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 46 CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-GET XMSR (Canadian residents). 47 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “XM RADIO SET” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “XM RADIO SET” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 72 OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select another channel. — CH UNAVAILABLE The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM Mini-Tuner or a XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or a XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. — - - - - No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. — 82 En 46,72 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 83 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ SIRIUS Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. 51 CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 51 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 51 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit supports, 51 ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is complete. — The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. 52 F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is complete. — CALL SIRIUS (CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE) The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 52 Select another channel. 52 Select another channel. 52 The subscription information is updated. INVALID The selected channel is currently out of service. Not Available The operation you made is not available. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUB UPDATED 51, 56 English 83 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 84 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 24 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11 E-2:NO SUR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 11 E-4:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-6:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 24 E-7:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 24 Check the speaker connections and placement. 10, 11, 24 E-8:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 24 E-9:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 24 84 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 85 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting After AUTO SETUP Warning message Cause Remedy See page W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). 12 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the nearest speaker and the furthest speaker is out of adjustable range. Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) If “SWFR:TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:TOO LOW” appears, adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 24, 65 Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 11 Use speakers of similar quality. — Notes • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. • If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2”, or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. • If an error message “E-9” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 19). Status message Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 19 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 19 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 85 En English Unknown iPod ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Loading... Cause 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 86 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ Bluetooth Status message Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The paring is completed. Canceled The paring is canceled. BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). No BT Adapter The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal. 86 En Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal. 19 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 87 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 23 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 75 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 75 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Press A STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold K TONE CONTROL and then press A STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press L PROGRAM l / h to select “INIT.”. 4 Press M STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press A STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press M STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press A STANDBY/ON. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Notes English 87 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 88 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Glossary Glossary ■ CINEMA DSP ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Composite video signal ■ DTS Digital Surround With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). ■ Component video signal ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. 88 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 89 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Glossary ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. English 89 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 90 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ................................................... 105 W [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ................................................... 105 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more • Maximum Power for Front, Center, Surround (JEITA) 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ....................................................... 130 W • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB • Dynamic Power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................... 90/110/130/150 W [Other models] (IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 100/110/125 W FM SECTION • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.27 dB • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .................... 2.0 V or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Total Harmonic Distortion [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 45 W, Front L/R, 8 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 6 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (200 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) to Front L/R ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance .............. 400 mV/470 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ........................................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP: SMALL/SML) ............................................................12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. • Maximum Input Level ........................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [Europe and Russia models] .............................. 230 V AC, 50 Hz [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... 240 V AC, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz [China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz [Asia model] ......................................... 220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz [General model] ...................... 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA [General model] .................................................................. 260 W [Other models] .................................................................... 240 W • Standby Power Consumption ................................................. 0.8 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models only] 5ch, 10% THD .................................................................... 440 W • AC Outlets [Australia model] ........................................ 1 (100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Other models]...................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 352 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 13-7/8”) VIDEO SECTION • Weight .............................................................. 8.5 kg (18 lbs 12 oz) • Video Signal Type (Gray back) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .................... NTSC [Other models] ....................................................................... PAL * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 90 En 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 91 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM INDEX Index ■ Symbols <XM> - - -, XM tuning status message ............... 82 ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 61 2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 61 2ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 38 3 OPTION MENU ............................... 70 3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 62 5ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 38 ■ A ■ B ■ C C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ...... 71 D D)CENTER GEQ, Sound menu .......... 66 D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ..... 69 D)PARAM. INI, Option menu ............ 71 Decoder indicators ............................... 22 Decoder mode, Input menu ................. 69 Decoder select mode, Decoder mode .. 69 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ... 13 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks .... 13 DIMENSION, Sound field parameter ..................... 40 Dimension, Sound field parameter ...... 40 DIMMER, Display settings ................. 70 Dimmer, Display settings .................... 70 DIRECT ............................................... 41 Direct Number Access mode, XM tuning ....................................... 48 Direct number access mode, XM tuning ....................................... 53 Disconnected, Bluetooth status message ................ 86 Disconnected, iPod controlling status message ...... 85 Display settings, Option menu ............ 70 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information ...................................... 50 DIST .................................................... 26 DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 26 DISTANCE ......................................... 25 DISTANCE, Auto setup ...................... 25 DOCK indicator ................................... 22 DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..................... 40 DSP level, Sound field parameter ....... 40 DTS decoder prioritize setting, Decoder mode ................................. 69 DVD player connection ....................... 16 DVD recorder connection .................... 17 Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 66 ■ E E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 66 E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 69 E)XM RADIO SET, Option menu .............................. 71, 72 E-1:NO FRONT SP, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-2:NO SURR.SP, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-4:NOISY, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-6:NO MIC, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-7:NO SIGNAL, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-8:USER CANCEL, Auto setup error message ................ 84 E-9:INTERNAL ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 84 Effect level, Sound field parameter ..... 40 91 En English B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 68 B)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .................................... 70 B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu .... 65 Background Video, Multi channel input setup ................ 69 BGV, Multi channel input setup .......... 69 Bluetooth setting, Option menu ........... 71 BT connected, Bluetooth status message ................. 86 ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 70 A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ....................................... 68 A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 63 A.DELAY, Audio settings ................... 66 ACQUIRING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message .................................. 83 Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 47 ALL CH SEARCH, XM tuning ........... 53 All Channel Search mode, XM tuning .................................. 48, 53 AM antenna connection ....................... 20 AM tuning ............................................ 43 Amplifier function OSD display time, Display settings ................................ 70 ANTENNA ERROR, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ....................... 83 Audio components, Connection ........... 18 Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 66 Audio information ................................ 36 Audio input jacks selection .................. 34 AUDIO jacks ....................................... 13 Audio jacks .......................................... 13 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 34 Audio select, Option menu .................. 71 Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 66 Audio signal flow ................................. 14 AUTO SETUP ..................................... 24 AUTO SETUP, Error message ............ 84 Automatic preset tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................. 44 Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 43 C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu ..........65 C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .........69 CALL SIRIUS, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ..................................83 Canceled, Troubleshooting ..................86 CAT SEARCH, XM tuning .................53 Category Search mode, XM tuning ......48 CD player, Connection .........................18 CD recorder, Connection .....................18 CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............63 Center speaker equalizer, Sound menu .....................................66 Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........63 Center width, Sound field parameter ...40 CHECK ANTENNA, XM tuning status message ............................................82 CHECK SR TUNER, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message .......................83 CINEMA DSP indicator ......................23 COAXIAL IN (1), Input assignment ...68 COAXIAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ..............................68 COAXIAL INPUT jacks ......................68 Completed, Bluetooth status message ..86 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............13 Connect error, iPod controlling status message ............................................85 Connect MIC!, Auto setup error message .................84 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals ...........................................12 Connection, AM antenna connection ...20 Connection, Audio components ...........18 Connection, CD player .........................18 Connection, CD recorder .....................18 Connection, DVD player ......................16 Connection, DVD recorder ..................17 Connection, external decoder ...............18 Connection, FM antenna ......................20 Connection, HDMI ...............................14 Connection, MD recorder .....................18 Connection, Multi-format player .........18 Connection, Power cable ......................20 Connection, PVR ..................................17 Connection, set-top boxes ....................17 Connection, VCR .................................17 Connection, Video components ...........15 Connection, Yamaha iPod universal dock ...........19 Controlling a TV ..................................73 Controlling other components, Remote control .................................74 Controlling this unit, Remote control ...73 Creating original SCENE templates .....31 CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ..........64 Crossover, Speaker settings .................64 CT WIDTH, Sound field parameter .....40 Current status display ...........................35 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 92 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Index ENHANCER indicator ........................ 22 Exchange, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................. 45 External decoder connection ................ 18 ■ ■ LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......64 LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............64 LOADING, XM tuning status message ...............82 Loading..., iPod controlling status message .......85 Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu .....................................66 LVL ......................................................26 LVL, Auto setup result .........................26 F F)DYNAMIC RANGE, Sound menu ..................................... 66 F)XM RADIO SET .............................. 72 F/W UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ................................. 83 Factory presets, Advanced setup ......... 77 FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 70 FM antenna .......................................... 20 FM antenna connection ........................ 20 FM tuning ............................................ 43 FRONT B speaker setting, Speaker settings ............................... 63 FRONT B, Speaker settings ................. 63 Front panel display ............................... 22 Front panel display scroll, Display settings ............................... 70 FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 63 Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 63 ■ G G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 66 G)SIRIUS SET .................................... 72 G)SIRIUS SET, Option menu ............. 72 Games, Sound field program ............... 38 ■ H H) HDMI SET, Sound menu ............... 67 Hall, Sound field program ................... 38 HDMI indicator .................................... 22 HDMI set, Sound menu ....................... 67 HDMI, Connection .............................. 14 HEADPHONE, Dynamic range .......... 66 Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 66 HEADPHONE, Low-frequency effect level .............. 66 Headphone, Low-frequency effect level .............. 66 Headphones .......................................... 35 Headphones indicator .......................... 22 ■ I Infrared window, Remote control ........ 23 INI.VOL., Audio settings .................... 67 Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 67 Input assignment, Input menu .............. 68 Input channel and speaker indicators ... 23 Input channel indicators ....................... 23 Input menu, Manual setup ................... 61 Input rename, Input menu .................... 68 Input source indicators ......................... 22 Input source information display ......... 36 INVALID, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ................................. 83 iPod connected, iPod controlling status message ............................................ 85 iPod control, Status message ............... 85 iPod using ............................................ 57 92 En J Jazz, Sound field program ....................38 ■ ■ L M Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning .................................44 MANUAL SETUP, SET MENU .........61 Manual setup, SET MENU ..................61 Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............43 MAX VOL., Audio settings .................67 Maximum volume, Audio settings .......67 MD recorder, Connection ....................18 Memory guard, Option menu ...............70 Menu browse mode, iPod controlling ..58 Movie Dramatic, Sound field program ........................38 Movie Spacious, Sound field program ........................38 MULTI CH INPUT component selection ...........................................34 Multi channel input setup, Input menu .......................................69 Multi-channel source with headphones ..............................39 Multi-format player connection ...........18 Multi-information display ....................23 Music Enh. 2ch, Sound field program ........................38 Music Enh. 5ch, Sound field program ........................38 MUTE ..................................................35 MUTE indicator ...................................22 MUTE TYPE, Audio settings ..............66 Muting ..................................................35 ■ N Neural Surround ...................................39 Night listening mode ............................42 No BT Adapter, Bluetooth status message .................86 NO SIGNAL, XM tuning status message ...............82 Not Available, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ..................................83 NOT SUPPORTED, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message .......................83 Number of speakers .............................26 Number of speakers, Auto setup result ..............................26 ■ O OFF AIR, XM tuning status message .............. 82 OPTICAL IN (2), Input assignment .... 68 OPTICAL IN (3), Input assignment .... 68 OPTICAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ............................. 68 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, Auto setup .... 24 Optimizer microphone ......................... 24 Optimizer microphone, Auto setup ..... 24 Optimizing speaker setting .................. 24 Option menu, Manual setup ................ 62 OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 70 OSD shift, Display settings ................. 70 OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 70 OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 70 Other components controlling by remote control ............................ 74 Other components controlling, Remote control ................................ 74 ■ P PANORAMA, Sound field parameter ..................... 40 Panorama, Sound field parameter ....... 40 Parameter initialization, Option menu .................................... 71 PARENTAL LOCK, SIRIUS Satellite Radio setting ........ 72 PCM indicator ..................................... 22 PHONES jack ...................................... 35 Play information display, iPod controlling ............................... 58 Playing video sources in the background ............................ 36 PLII Game ........................................... 39 PLII Movie .......................................... 39 PLII Music ........................................... 39 Pop/Rock, Sound field program .......... 38 Power cable, Connection ..................... 20 Preset channel setting, XM tuning ................................. 49, 54 Preset SCENE templates ..................... 30 Preset Search mode, XM tuning ................................. 48, 53 PRESET SEARCH, XM tuning ....................................... 53 Preset station exchange, FM/AM tuning ................................ 45 Preset station selection, FM/AM tuning ................................ 45 PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 77 Pro Logic ............................................. 39 Pure hi-fi sound ................................... 41 PVR connection ................................... 17 ■ R Remote control codes ........................... iii Remote control, Troubleshooting ........ 87 Rename, SCENE template .................. 31 Repeat .................................................. 58 Repeat, iPod controlling ...................... 58 Resetting the system ............................ 87 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page 93 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Index ■ S SPEAKER, Low-frequency effect level ..............66 Speaker, Low-frequency effect level ...66 Specifications .......................................90 SSR PIN, Advanced setup ....................76 STRAIGHT ..........................................39 Straight .................................................39 SUB UPDATED, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ..................................83 SUBWOOFER PHASE, Speaker settings ...............................64 Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......64 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............67 Support audio, HDMI set .....................67 SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............64 Surround left/right speakers, Speaker settings ...............................64 ■ T Test tone, Center speaker equalizer .....66 TEST, Center speaker equalizer ...........66 Tonal quality adjustment ......................41 Troubleshooting ...................................78 TU, Advanced setup .............................77 Tuner (FM/AM), Troubleshooting .......81 Tuner frequency step, Advanced setup ................................77 Tuner indicators ...................................22 Turning off the power ..........................21 Turning on the power ...........................21 TV Sports, Sound field program ..........38 ■ W-2:DISTANCE ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 85 W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 85 WIRING/LEVEL ................................ 25 WIRING/LEVEL, Auto setup ............. 25 ■ X XM ANTENNA .................................. 72 XM ANTENNA, XM Radio setting ............................ 72 XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................... 46 XM Radio antenna ............................... 72 XM Radio antenna, XM Radio setting ............................ 72 XM Radio setting ................................ 72 XM Radio setting, Option menu ......... 72 XM Satellite Radio .............................. 82 XM Satellite Radio tuning ................... 46 XM Satellite Radio, Status message .... 82 ■ Y Yamaha iPod universal dock, Connection ...................................... 19 Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer ......................................... 24 YPAO .................................................. 24 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ........................ 24 YPAO indicator ................................... 22 U Unable to play, iPod controlling status message ..................................85 UNIT, Speaker distance .......................65 Unit, Speaker distance ..........................65 Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status message ..................................85 Unplug HP!, Auto setup error message .................84 UPDATING, SIRIUS Satellite Radio status message ..................................83 UPDATING, XM tuning status message ...............82 ■ V W W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Auto setup error message .................85 “JSPEAKERS” or “4DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. 93 En English VCR connection ...................................17 VIDEO AUX jacks, Front panel ..........19 Video components, Connection ...........15 Video information ................................36 VIDEO jacks ........................................13 Video jacks ...........................................13 Video signal flow .................................14 Video sources in the background .........36 Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................39 VIRTUAL indicator .............................23 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................3 VOLUME level indicator .....................22 Volume Trim, Input menu ....................69 ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SCENE ................................................... 7 SCENE template selection ................... 28 Searching..., Bluetooth status message ................. 86 Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 34 Selection, MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 34 Selection, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................. 45 Selection, SCENE template ................. 28 SET MENU .......................................... 61 Setting remote control codes ................ 75 Setting SCENE template input source, Remote control ................................ 32 Set-top box connection ........................ 17 Shuffle, iPod controlling ...................... 58 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 39 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 23 Simple remote mode, iPod controlling ............................... 57 SIRIUS Satellite Radio ........................ 83 SIRIUS Satellite Radio parental lock .. 72 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock, Advanced setup ................................ 76 SIRIUS Satellite Radio setting ............ 72 SIRIUS Satellite Radio setting, Option menu .................................... 72 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ............. 51 SiriusConnect tuner .............................. 51 SIZE ..................................................... 25 SIZE, Auto setup .................................. 25 SLEEP indicator .................................. 23 Sleep timer ........................................... 37 Sound field programs with headphones .............................. 39 Sound menu, Manual setup .................. 61 Source feature OSD display time, Display settings ................................ 70 SP ......................................................... 26 SP A B indicators ................................. 22 SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 76 SP, Auto setup result ............................ 26 Speaker distance ............................ 25, 26 Speaker distance, Auto setup ............... 25 Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 26 Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 65 Speaker distances, Speaker distance .... 65 Speaker impedance setting ................... 21 Speaker impedance, Advanced setup ... 76 Speaker level ........................................ 26 Speaker level adjustment ..................... 41 Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 26 Speaker level, Sound menu .................. 65 Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 63 Speaker size ......................................... 25 Speaker size, Auto setup ...................... 25 Speaker wiring ..................................... 25 Speaker wiring, Auto setup .................. 25 Speaker wiring/volume level, Auto setup ........................................ 25 SPEAKER, Dynamic range ................. 66 Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 66 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page i Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM ■ Front panel A B C D E F GH I VOLUME STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY INFO TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 4 l STRAIGHT INPUT DIRECT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA J i 2 h K L M N O P Q VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page ii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM ■ Remote control 1 2 3 4 POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE H I J K TV CH L TV VOL 5 SCENE 6 7 1 2 9 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE 8 3 N ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY M O REC 0 A l PROG h ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT P Q R S t APPENDIX B C D E F G INFO ii 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page iii Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM List of remote control codes Blu-ray player Samsung 2137 CD player Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recorder Yamaha 5001 DVD Acoustic Solutions 2078 Aiwa 2055, 2100 Akai 2096 Akura 2076 Alba 2078, 2086 Apex 2027, 2049 Awa 2078 Axion 2078 Brainwave 2096 Brandt 2073, 2085 Broksonic 2060 Bush 2075, 2078, 2112 Centrex 2077 Classic 2078 Clatronic 2075 Coby 2078 C-Tech 2074 CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091 Daewoo 2092, 2098 Dansai 2096 Daytek 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 Denon 2030, 2102, 2103 Denver 2075, 2076 Diamond 2074 DK Digital 2094 Dual 2078 D-Vision 2096 DVX 2074 Elta 2096 Euroline 2096 Funai 2052, 2058 Global Solutions2074 Global Sphere 2074 Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078 Grundig 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 Haaz 2074 HE 2078 Hitachi 2032, 2072 Home Electronics 2078 Innovation 2072 Irradio 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 Kenwood 2030, 2097 Kingavon 2075 Koda 2075 Lawson 2074 Lenco 2075 LG 2084, 2087 Lifetec 2072 Limit 2074 LogicLab 2074 Luxor 2077 Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075 Magnum 2072 iii MBO Medion Micromaxx Micromedia Microstar Mitsubishi Mizuda Mustek Naiko Onkyo Orava P&B Pacific Panasonic 2078 2072 2072 2073 2072 2035 2075 2078 2077 2073, 2135 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 Philips 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 Pioneer 2036, 2082 Proline 2077 Provision 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 Red Star 2076 Reoc 2074 Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086 Rowa 2077 Saba 2085 Sabaki 2074 Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 Sansui 2074 Sanyo 2095 ScanMagic 2078 Scientific Labs 2074 Scott 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 Silva 2076 Singer 2074 Skymaster 2074, 2078 Skyworth 2076 SM Electronic 2074, 2078 Sony 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 Soundmaster 2074 Soundmax 2074 Standard 2074 Star Cluster 2074 Starmedia 2075 Supervision 2074, 2078 Sylvania 2052, 2058 Synn 2074 TCM 2072 Teac 2074 Tec 2076 Technics 2030 Technika 2096 Technosonic 2096 Tevion 2072, 2074 Thomson 2085, 2109 Tokai 2076 Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 United 2078 Voxson 2078 Wharfedale 2074 Xlogic 2074 Yakumo 2077 Yamada 2077 Yamaha Yukai Zenith 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD Recorder Apex JVC LG Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Sony Toshiba Yamaha Yukai 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 DVD/LD Pioneer 2036 DVD/VCR JVC LG Panasonic Philips RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Zenith 1017, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025 1022, 2042 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 DVD-DVR Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 Philips 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014 Proscan 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120 Sharp 2009, 2010 Sonic Blue 2119, 2120 Sony 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 Stack 10 2132 Stack 9 2132 Systemax 2132 Tagar Systems 2132 Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132 Touch 2132 UltimateTV 2133 Viewsonic 2132 Voodoo 2132 Yamaha 2011 ZT Group 2132 HD DVD Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH Network 2126, 2127 Dishpro 2126 Echostar 2126, 2127 Expressvu 2126 Gateway 2132 GOI 2126 Hewlett Packard 2132 Hitachi 2008 Howard Computers 2132 HTS 2126 Hughes 2123, 2128 Humax 2123 Hush 2132 iBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 Linksys 2132 Media Center PC 2132 2136 iPod Yamaha 5011 LD player Yamaha 2067 2114 2115 2068 DVR ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DIRECTV Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic 2002 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK Yamaha 5005, 5006 TUNER Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 TV Acer Acme Acura ADA ADC Admiral Adyson Agashi Agazi AGB Aiko Aiwa 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page iv Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Akai Cascade Cathay CCE Celebrity Centurion Century CGE Cimline Citizen 0208 0213, 0217 0127 0059 0213, 0217 0205 0214, 0215 0208, 0218 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 City 0208 Clarivox 0212, 0217 Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 Colortyme 0060, 0061 Concerto 0060, 0061 Concorde 0208 Condor 0200, 0207, 0213 Contec 0200, 0207, 0208 Contec/Cony 0062 Continental Edison 0216 Cosmel 0208 Craig 0062 Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215 Crown 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 Cybertron 0209, 0218 Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218 Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 Dantax 0217 Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208 De Graaf 0210 Decca 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 Desmet 0213, 0217 Diamond 0200 Dimensia 0057 Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217 DTS 0208 Dual 0207, 0215, 0216 Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215 Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 Durabrand 0126 Dux 0217 Dynatron 0213, 0217 Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 Elbe-Sharp 0204 Elcit 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 Electroband 0059 Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061 Elin 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Elite 0209, 0213, 0218 Elman 0215 Elta 0200, 0208 Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 Envision Erres ESA Etron Euro-Feel Euroline Euroman Euromann Europhon 0060, 0061 0213, 0217 0080 0208 0206 0217 0200 0206, 0207, 0213 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 Fenner 0208 Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226 Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210 Finlandia 0210 Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 Flint 0213, 0218 Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 Formenti-Phoenix 0200 Fortress 0205 Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 Futuretech 0062 Gateway 0094 GBC 0208, 0215, 0218 GE 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215 General Technic 0208 Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 Gibralter 0060 GoldHand 0200 GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 Graetz 0211 Granada 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217 Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 Grunpy 0062 Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207 Hallmark 0060, 0061 Hampton 0200, 0207 Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 Hantarex 0204, 0208 Harvard 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 Hifivox 0216 Higashi 0200 Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Hisawa Hitachi 0209, 0218 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 Hornyphon 0213 Hoshai 0209, 0218 Huanyu 0200, 0207 Hygashi 0200, 0207 Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICeS 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 Indiana 0213, 0217 Infinity 0063 Ingelen 0211 Ingersol 0208 Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Innovation 0206, 0208 Interbuy 0208, 0214 Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 International 0200 Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218 Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Isukai 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 Jensen 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 Kamosonic 0207 Kamp 0200, 0207 Kapsch 0211 Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 Kendo 0128, 0210 Kennedy 0215 Kenwood 0060, 0061 Kingsley 0200, 0207 Kloss Novabeam 0062 Kneissel 0203 Kolster 0213 Konka 0209, 0218 Korpel 0213, 0217 Korting 0205 Koyoda 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 Kyoto 0200, 0212 iv APPENDIX 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 Akiba 0209, 0218 Akura 0206, 0209, 0218 Alaron 0200 Alba 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 ALBIRAL 0212 Allstar 0213 Amplivision 0207 Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 Amtron 0062 Anam 0208 Anam National 0062 Anglo 0208 Anitech 0206, 0208 Ansonic 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 Apex 0118, 0122, 0132 Arc en Ciel 0216 Arcam 0200 Arcam Delta 0207 Aristona 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 Asberg 0213 Astra 0208 Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Atori 0208 Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AudioTon 0207 Audiovox 0062 Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207 Awa 0200 Baird 0216 Bang & Olufsen 0205 Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Bastide 0207 Baur 0217 Beko 0228 Belcor 0060 Bell & Howell 0058, 0064 Benq 0081 Beon 0213, 0217 Bestar 0213 Binatone 0207 Black Star 0214 Blaupunkt 0255 Blue Sky 0209, 0218 Bondstec 0214 Boots 0207 Bradford 0062 Brandt 0216, 0226 Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217 Britannia 0200, 0207 Brockwood 0060 Broksonic 0138 Bruns 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 Bush 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 Candle 0060, 0061 Capsonic 0206 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page v Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Lenco Lenoir Lesa Leyco LG 0208 0207, 0208 0214 0206, 0213, 0217 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Liesenk 0217 Life 0206, 0208 Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218 Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217 Logik 0058 Luma 0210, 0217 Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217 Lux May 0213 Luxman 0060, 0061 Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207 Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 Magnum 0206, 0208 Majestic 0058 Mandor 0206 Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 Marelli 0205 Mark 0200, 0213, 0217 Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 Mediator 0213, 0217 Medion 0206, 0208 Megatron 0061 Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 Memphis 0208 Metz 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 Micromaxx 0206, 0208 Microstar 0206, 0208 Minerva 0204 Minoka 0213 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 Montgomery Ward 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 Multi System 0217 Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 Murphy 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 Naonis 0210 v NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 Nesco 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 New Tech 0208, 0213 New World 0209, 0218 Nicamagic 0200, 0207 Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Nikko 0061 Nobliko 0200, 0207 Nogamatic 0216 Nokia 0129, 0211 Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 Nordvision 0217 Oceanic 0211 Olevia 0084 ONCEAS 0207 Onwa 0062, 0218 Orbit 0213 Orion 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 Orline 0218 Orsowe 0204 Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Osio 0201 Oso 0209, 0218 Osume 0218 Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 Pael 0200, 0207 Palladium 0207 Panama 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216 Pausa 0208 Perdio 0200 Philco 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 Philharmonic 0207 Philips 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 Philips Magnavox 0124 Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Pilot 0060 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 Plantron 0206, 0213 Polaroid 0075 Poppy 0208 Portland 0060, 0061 Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210 Precision 0207 Prima 0208, 0211 Profex 0208 Profi-Tronic 0213 Proline 0213 Proscan 0057 Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217 Protech 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Proton 0060, 0061 Provision 0217 Pulsar 0060 Pye 0213, 0217 Pymi 0208 Quasar 0152, 0214 Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Radialva 0218 Radio Shack 0064 Radio Shack/Realistic 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 Radiola 0213, 0217 Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214 Radiotone 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 Realistic 0064 Revox 0213, 0217 Rex 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 Rhapsody 0200 R-Line 0213, 0217 Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 Robotron 0205 Rowa 0200 RTF 0205 Saba 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 saccs 0212 Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 Salora 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 Sambers 0204 Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 Sandra 0200, 0207 Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213 Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 Scotch 0061 Scott 0060, 0061, 0062 Sears 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211 Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215 Sencora 0208 Sentra 0218 Serino 0200 Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 Shogun 0060 Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215 Sicatel 0212 Siemens 0255 Sierra 0213 Signature 0058 Silva 0200 Singer 0205, 0214, 0215 Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 Skantic 0211 Solavox 0211 Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 Sonolor 0211 Sontec 0213, 0217 Sony 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 Sound & Vision 0209, 0218 Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062 Soundwave 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 Standard 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Starlight 0217 Starlite 0062 Stenway 0218 Stern 0210, 0211 Sunkai 0208, 0218 Sunwood 0208, 0213 Superla 0200, 0204, 0207 SuperTech 0200 Supra 0208 Supreme 0059 Susumu 0209 Sutron 0208 Sydney 0200, 0207 Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 Symphonic 0062, 0080 Sysline 0217 Sytong 0200 01EN_RX-V463_U.book Page vi Friday, February 1, 2008 11:43 AM Tandy Weltblick 0213, 0217 Weston 0215 White Westinghouse 0200, 0207, 0217 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0060, 0061 Yamishi 0218 Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Yorx 0209, 0218 Zanussi 0210 Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD Aiwa Apex Broksonic Bush JVC Panasonic RCA Sylvania Thomson Toshiba 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 0254, 2054, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 0231, 2048, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR Panasonic Samsung Sharp Sylvania Toshiba 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR Aiwa Bush Daewoo GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi JVC Magnavox Orion Panasonic Philips Quasar RCA Roadstar Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania Tatung Toshiba Zenith 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 0147, 1030 0240, 1069 0236, 1062 0156, 1039 0153, 1036 0150, 1033 0235, 1065 0151, 1034 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 0152, 1035 0149, 1032 0237, 1066 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 0145, 1028 0234, 1064 0148, 1031 0237, 1066 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 0154, 1037 VCR Admiral Adventura Aiwa Akai Akiba Akura 1008, 1013 1005 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 1007, 1043 1050 1043, 1050 Alba American High Amstrad Anitech ASA Asha Asuka 1044, 1050 1004 1042 1050 1045, 1046 1002, 1014 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 Audio Dynamics1000 Audiovox 1003 Baird 1042, 1043, 1047 Basic Line 1044, 1050 Baur 1046 Beaumark 1002, 1014 Bell & Howell 1001 Blaupunkt 1046, 1048 Broksonic 1012, 1013 Bush 1044, 1050, 1066 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 Cimline 1044, 1050 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colortyme 1000 Colt 1006 Craig 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 Crown 1050 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 Cybernex 1002, 1014 Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 Dansai 1050 Dantax 1044 DBX 1000 De Graaf 1046, 1049 Decca 1042, 1043, 1046 Denon 1010 Dimensia 1009 Dual 1043, 1046 Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 Dynatech 1005 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Elta 1050 Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 Etzuko 1050 Ferguson 1043 Fidelity 1042 Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049 Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 Fisher 1001, 1047 Flint 1044 Formenti/Phoenix 1046 Fuji 1004 Fujitsu 1042 Funai 1005, 1042 Galaxy 1042 Garrard 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 Geloso 1050 General Technic 1044, 1048 Go Video 1014 GoldHand Goldstar 1050 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 Gradiente 1005 Graetz 1043, 1047 Granada 1046, 1047, 1049 Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050 Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062 Hanseatic 1045, 1046 Harley Davidson1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Harwood 1006 HCM 1050 Headquarter 1001 Hinari 1044, 1050 Hisawa 1044 Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 Hughes Network Systems 1010 Hypson 1044, 1050 Imperial 1042 Inno Hit 1046, 1050 Innovation 1044, 1048 Instant Replay 1004 Interbuy 1045 Interfunk 1046, 1047 Intervision 1042 Irradio 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 Jensen 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 Kaisui 1050 Karcher 1046 Kendo 1044 Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 Kodak 1003, 1004 Korpel 1050 Leyco 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 Lifetec 1044, 1048 Lloyd's 1005 Loewe 1048 Loewe Opta 1045, 1046 Logik 1006, 1050 Luxor 1047 LXI 1003 M Electronic 1042 Magnasonic 1047 Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033 Magnin 1003, 1014 Manesth 1050 Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 Marta 1003 Matsui 1044, 1045 Matsushita 1004 Mediator 1046 Medion 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 vi APPENDIX 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210 Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 Teac 0127 Tec 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Techwood 0060, 0061 Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 Teleavia 0216 Telecor 0218 Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216 Telegazi 0218 Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217 Teleton 0207 Televideon 0200 Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Tesmet 0213 Tevion 0206, 0208 Texet 0200, 0207 Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 Thorn 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 Tokai 0213 Tokyo 0200, 0207 Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 Towada 0211, 0215 Transtec 0200 Trident 0204 Tristar 0218 Triumph 0204 Uher 0211, 0213 Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 United 0217 Universum 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Univox 0212 Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Vexa 0208, 0217 Victor 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 Videosat 0214 VideoSystem 0213 Videotechnic 0200 Vidtech 0060, 0061 Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 Visiola 0200, 0207 Vision 0213 Vortec 0213, 0217 Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 Waltham 0207, 0212 Wards 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 Watson 0213, 0217, 0218 Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 Wega 0205 RX-V463_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, February 1, 2008 11:48 AM U Memorex Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco Philips 1043 1010, 1014 1010, 1049 1042 1004, 1051 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 Philips Magnavox 1018 Phonola 1046 Pilot 1003 Pioneer 1011, 1046 Prinz 1042 Profex 1050 Profitronic 1014 Proline 1042 Proscan 1009 Prosonic 1044 Protec 1006 Pye 1046, 1056 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001, 1047 Quasar 1004, 1035 Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Radiola 1046 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Rex 1043 RFT 1046 Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066 Saba 1043 Saisho 1044, 1050 Salora 1047 Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 Sanky 1008 Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047 Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 Scott 1012 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-Sinudyne 1046 Seleco 1043 Sentron 1050 Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050 Shivaki 1045 Shogun 1002, 1014 Siemens 1045, 1047 Signature 2000 1008 Silva 1045 Singer 1004, 1006 Sinudyne 1046 Sontec 1045 Sony 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 Sunkai 1044 Sunstar 1042 Suntronic 1042 Sunwood 1050 Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 Symphonic 1005 Taisho 1044 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003, 1042 © 2008 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 Teac 1005, 1007 Technics 1004, 1048 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Teleavia 1043 Telefunken 1043 Tenosal 1050 Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050 Tevion 1044, 1048 Thomson 1043, 1058 Thorn 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 Tokai 1045, 1050 Tonsai 1050 Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014 Towada 1050 Towika 1050 Uher 1045 Unitech 1002, 1014 Universum 1042, 1045, 1046 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videon 1044, 1048 Videosonic 1002, 1014 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 Weltblick 1045 White Westinghouse 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007 Yamishi 1050 Yokan 1050 Yoko 1045, 1050 Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037 RX-V463 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 Memphis 1050 Metz 1048 MGA 1014 MGN Technology 1002, 1014 Micromaxx 1044, 1048 Microstar 1044, 1048 Migros 1042 Minolta 1010 Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046 Montgomery Ward 1008 Motorola 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 Murphy 1042 National 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 Neckermann 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 Nesco 1050 Nikko 1003 Noblex 1002, 1014 Nokia 1043, 1047 Nordmende 1043 Oceanic 1042, 1043 Okano 1044 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003, 1008 Orion 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 Orson 1042 Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050 Otto Versand 1046 Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050 Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 RX-V463 AV Receiver All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in China WN25670 00_sheet_RX-V463_UC.book Page 1 Wednesday, November 28, 2007 2:23 PM UC RX-V463 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. ■ Front panel/Face avant A B C D F E GH I VOLUME STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY INFO TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h VIDEO AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA J K L M N O P Q L AUDIO R PORTABLE 00_sheet_RX-V463_UC.book Page i Wednesday, November 28, 2007 2:23 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande 1 2 3 4 POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER XM SIRIUS MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK B C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 H I J K TV CH L TV VOL 5 SCENE 6 7 9 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE 8 3 N ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY M O REC 0 A B C D E F G INFO l PROG h ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT P Q R S t Printed in China WN26190